VX6 Reference Guide - L
VX6 Reference Guide
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Some of the features shown in this guide are obsolete. This electronic guide has been made available as
a courtesy to our customers. Contact your LXE representative for equipment replacement and
assistance.
Copyright © 2010 by LXE Inc.
All Rights Reserved
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Notices
Notice:
LXE Inc. reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this manual at any time
without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its
accuracy, LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the
information contained herein. Further, LXE Incorporated, reserves the right to revise this publication and to make
changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or
changes.
Copyright Notice:
This manual is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied,
photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior
consent, in writing, from LXE Inc.
Copyright © 2010 by LXE Inc. An EMS Technologies Company.
125 Technology Parkway, Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. (770) 447-4224
Trademarks:
LXE® is a registered trademark of LXE Inc. RFTerm® is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Norcross, GA.
Microsoft, Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Java® and Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in
the U.S. or other countries, and are used under license.
Intel and Intel XScale are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries.
RAM® and RAM Mount™ are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA
98108.
The Cisco Square Bridge logo is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Aironet, Cisco and Cisco Systems are
registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
Summit Data Communications, Inc. Summit Data Communications, the Summit logo, and “The Pinnacle of
Performance” are trademarks of Summit Data Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
Symbol, the Symbol logo and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by LXE,
Inc. is under license.
Wavelink® and Wavelink Avalanche® are registered trademarks and the Wavelink logo, tagline and Avalanche
MC are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation, Kirkland, WA.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or
organizations.
When this manual is in PDF format: “Acrobat® Reader® Copyright © 2010Adobe Systems Incorporated. All
rights reserved. Adobe®, the Adobe logo, Acrobat®, and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.” applies.
Revision Notice
VX6 Reference Guide
Upgrade to Revision L-ARC
Section
Explanation
Entire document
Archived to capture obsolete features.
Note:
A complete revision history is included in Appendix D, “Reference Material”.
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1
Overview .................................................................................................................... 1
When to Use this Guide............................................................................................ 2
Document Conventions ............................................................................................................3
Quick Start................................................................................................................. 4
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................4
Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key ...........................................................................5
Hotkey (Activation hotkey)....................................................................................................5
Touch......................................................................................................................................5
Components .............................................................................................................. 6
Data Entry .................................................................................................................. 9
Keyboard Data Entry ................................................................................................................9
Tethered Scanners.....................................................................................................................9
Bluetooth Scanners ...................................................................................................................9
RS-232 Data Entry....................................................................................................................9
Touchscreen Entry ..................................................................................................................10
Right Click ...........................................................................................................................10
Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)............................................................................................10
Touchscreen and Mouse.......................................................................................................11
Setup the Radio and Network ................................................................................ 12
Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters ................................................................. 12
Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect ................................................................. 13
Install LXEConnect ................................................................................................................13
Using LXEConnect.................................................................................................................15
ActiveSync – Initial Setup ...................................................................................... 16
USB Connection .....................................................................................................................16
Serial Connection ...................................................................................................................16
Connect.................................................................................................................................16
Radio.......................................................................................................................................16
Bluetooth ................................................................................................................. 17
Initial Use ...............................................................................................................................17
Settings Tab | Bluetooth Options .........................................................................................18
Report when connection lost.......................................................................................................... 18
Report when reconnected............................................................................................................... 18
Report failure to reconnect............................................................................................................. 18
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
ii
Table of Contents
Computer is connectable................................................................................................................ 18
Computer is discoverable............................................................................................................... 18
Prompt if devices request to pair ................................................................................................... 18
Continuous search.......................................................................................................................... 19
Subsequent Use.......................................................................................................................19
Bluetooth Devices...................................................................................................................20
Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup .........................................................................................21
Introduction.................................................................................................................................... 21
VX6 with Label ............................................................................................................................. 21
VX6 without Label ........................................................................................................................ 22
Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications ............................................................................................ 23
Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off ........................................................ 24
Saving Changes to the Registry ............................................................................ 24
Getting Help............................................................................................................. 25
Manuals and Accessories ...................................................................................... 25
Manuals...................................................................................................................................25
Accessories .............................................................................................................................25
CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT
29
Identifying Your VX6 ............................................................................................... 29
Hardware Platforms ................................................................................................................29
Software Revisions .................................................................................................................29
Hardware Configuration ......................................................................................... 30
System Hardware....................................................................................................................30
Central Processing Unit ..........................................................................................................31
I/O Components......................................................................................................................31
System Memory......................................................................................................................31
Video Subsystem ....................................................................................................................31
Power Supply..........................................................................................................................32
Uninterruptible Power Supply..............................................................................................32
Backup Battery.....................................................................................................................32
PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................................32
CF Slot ....................................................................................................................................32
SD Slot....................................................................................................................................32
Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing.........................................................................................................33
Power Modes........................................................................................................... 34
Physical Controls.................................................................................................... 35
On/Off Switch.........................................................................................................................35
External Connectors ............................................................................................... 36
Scanner Serial Connector (COM1).........................................................................................37
Pinout ...................................................................................................................................37
Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3).....................................................................................38
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
iii
Pinout ...................................................................................................................................38
Technical Specifications – Connection Cable......................................................................39
RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port ................................................................................... 39
Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable .............................................................40
Ethernet/USB Connector ........................................................................................................41
Pinout ...................................................................................................................................41
Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables .................................................................................................42
D15 Female Connector.........................................................................................................43
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 43
USB Host Connector ............................................................................................................44
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 44
USB Client Connector..........................................................................................................44
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 44
RJ45 Connector ....................................................................................................................45
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 45
Audio Connector.....................................................................................................................46
Pinout ...................................................................................................................................46
Power Supply Connector ........................................................................................................47
Pinout ...................................................................................................................................47
UPS Battery Pack Connectors ................................................................................................48
Input .....................................................................................................................................48
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 48
Output...................................................................................................................................48
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 48
UPS Battery Extension Cable Connectors..............................................................................49
Input .....................................................................................................................................49
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 49
Output...................................................................................................................................49
Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 49
Antenna Connections..............................................................................................................50
Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin ......................................................................50
Vehicle Remote Antenna Mount..........................................................................................50
Internal Antenna .....................................................................................................................51
The QWERTY Keyboard ......................................................................................... 52
IBM 3270 Overlay..................................................................................................................52
IBM 5252 Overlay..................................................................................................................52
Key Maps................................................................................................................................53
Custom Key Maps ................................................................................................................53
NumLock and the VX6...........................................................................................................53
Keyboard Backlight ................................................................................................................53
Keyboard LEDs ......................................................................................................................54
CAPS LED ...........................................................................................................................54
Secondary Keys LED ...........................................................................................................55
Control Keys ........................................................................................................................56
General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................57
USB Keyboard/Mouse............................................................................................................57
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
iv
Table of Contents
Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) ..............................................................................................58
Enabling the Input Panel ......................................................................................................59
The Display.............................................................................................................. 60
Cleaning the Display ..............................................................................................................60
Touchscreen............................................................................................................................60
Touchscreen Heater..............................................................................................................60
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots ...................................................................................... 61
PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................................61
PCMCIA Pinout ...................................................................................................................62
Install PCMCIA Cards .........................................................................................................63
Install the Type II PCMCIA Radio ................................................................................................ 63
CF Card Slot ...........................................................................................................................67
Replace a CF Card................................................................................................................67
SD Card Slot ...........................................................................................................................68
Install an SD Card ................................................................................................................68
Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 69
External Power Supply ...........................................................................................................69
Specifications .......................................................................................................................70
Environmental Specifications ..............................................................................................70
Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection...................................................................................71
VX6 Input Power Specifications..........................................................................................72
Power Adapter Cable ...........................................................................................................72
CMOS Battery ........................................................................................................................73
Fuse.........................................................................................................................................73
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
75
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 75
Windows CE Operating System............................................................................. 75
Wireless Network Configuration............................................................................................75
Warmboot ...............................................................................................................................75
Coldboot .................................................................................................................................75
Installed Software ................................................................................................... 76
Software Load.........................................................................................................................76
Software Applications ..........................................................................................................76
Java (Optional) .....................................................................................................................77
LXE RFTerm (Optional) ......................................................................................................77
AppLock...............................................................................................................................77
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) .............................................................................77
Desktop.................................................................................................................... 79
Folders Copies at Startup........................................................................................................80
My Device Folders .................................................................................................................80
Start Menu Program Options ................................................................................. 81
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
v
Communication.......................................................................................................................82
ActiveSync ...........................................................................................................................82
Connect.................................................................................................................................83
Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server .....................................................................................83
Command Prompt ...................................................................................................................84
Internet Explorer.....................................................................................................................84
Media Player...........................................................................................................................84
Remote Desktop Connection ..................................................................................................85
Transcriber..............................................................................................................................85
Windows Explorer ..................................................................................................................85
Taskbar ...................................................................................................................................86
Advanced Tab ......................................................................................................................86
Control Panel Options ............................................................................................ 87
About ......................................................................................................................................88
Language and Fonts .............................................................................................................89
Identifying Software Versions .............................................................................................90
Radio MAC Address ............................................................................................................90
Accessibility ...........................................................................................................................91
Administrator Control.............................................................................................................92
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................93
Discover ...............................................................................................................................94
Bluetooth Devices ................................................................................................................95
Bluetooth Device Properties .......................................................................................................... 96
Settings .................................................................................................................................97
Turn Off Bluetooth Button ............................................................................................................ 97
Options........................................................................................................................................... 97
About ....................................................................................................................................98
Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect........................................................................................99
Certificates............................................................................................................................100
Date/Time .............................................................................................................................100
Dialing ..................................................................................................................................101
Display..................................................................................................................................102
Background ........................................................................................................................102
Appearance.........................................................................................................................102
Backlight ............................................................................................................................102
Input Panel ............................................................................................................................103
Internet Options ....................................................................................................................104
Keyboard...............................................................................................................................105
KeyPad..................................................................................................................................106
KeyMap..............................................................................................................................106
LaunchApp .........................................................................................................................107
RunCmd..............................................................................................................................108
How To: Remap a Single Key............................................................................................108
How To: Remap a Key Sequence.......................................................................................108
How To: Remap an Application Launch............................................................................108
How To: Remap a Command.............................................................................................109
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
vi
Table of Contents
Mixer.....................................................................................................................................110
Mouse ...................................................................................................................................111
MX3X-VXC Options............................................................................................................111
Communication ..................................................................................................................111
Enable TCP/IP Version 6............................................................................................................. 111
Allow Remote Desktop Autologon.............................................................................................. 111
Autolaunch TimeSync ................................................................................................................. 112
Misc....................................................................................................................................112
CapsLock ..................................................................................................................................... 112
Touch Screen Disable .................................................................................................................. 112
Touch Screen Heater Disable....................................................................................................... 112
Status Popup.......................................................................................................................113
Network and Dialup Connections.........................................................................................114
Owner ...................................................................................................................................115
Password ...............................................................................................................................116
PC Connection ......................................................................................................................117
PCMCIA ...............................................................................................................................118
Power ....................................................................................................................................119
Regional Settings ..................................................................................................................120
Remove Programs.................................................................................................................120
Scanner .................................................................................................................................120
Stylus ....................................................................................................................................121
Double Tap.........................................................................................................................121
Calibration..........................................................................................................................121
System...................................................................................................................................122
General ...............................................................................................................................122
Memory ..............................................................................................................................123
Device Name ......................................................................................................................123
Copyrights ..........................................................................................................................123
Terminal Server Client Licenses ..........................................................................................124
Volume and Sounds..............................................................................................................124
Wi-Fi.....................................................................................................................................124
CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs.......................................................... 125
Access Files on the Flash Card.............................................................................................125
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync ................................................................... 126
Prerequisites..........................................................................................................................126
VX6 and ActiveSync Partnership ......................................................................................126
Serial Port Transfer ............................................................................................................126
USB Transfer......................................................................................................................127
Connect .................................................................................................................................127
Explore..................................................................................................................................127
Disconnect ............................................................................................................................128
Serial Connection ...............................................................................................................128
USB Connection.................................................................................................................128
Radio Connection...............................................................................................................128
Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection...............................128
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
vii
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................129
Create a Communication Option ..........................................................................................130
Technical Specifications – Connection Cable ......................................................................131
VX6 Utilities ........................................................................................................... 132
LAUNCH.EXE .....................................................................................................................132
REGEDIT.EXE ....................................................................................................................134
REGLOAD.EXE ..................................................................................................................134
REGDUMP.EXE ..................................................................................................................134
WARMBOOT.EXE..............................................................................................................134
WAVPLAY.EXE..................................................................................................................134
VX6 Command-line Utilites.................................................................................................134
COLDBOOT.EXE .............................................................................................................134
PrtScrn.EXE .......................................................................................................................134
API Calls ................................................................................................................ 135
Reflash the VX6..................................................................................................... 136
How To: Reflash using Keypress Method...........................................................................136
How To: Reflash using TAG file Method ...........................................................................137
Clearing Persistent Storage ................................................................................. 138
Network Configuration ......................................................................................... 138
Wireless Radios ....................................................................................................................138
Ethernet Connector ...............................................................................................................138
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration ....................................................... 139
Briefly . . . .............................................................................................................................139
Enabler Install Process..........................................................................................................139
Enabler Install Process..........................................................................................................139
Enabler Uninstall Process .....................................................................................................139
Stop the Enabler Service.......................................................................................................140
Update Monitoring Overview...............................................................................................140
Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings....................................................................141
Enabler Configuration ..........................................................................................................142
File Menu Options..............................................................................................................143
Avalanche Update Settings ................................................................................................144
Menu Options .............................................................................................................................. 144
Connection ................................................................................................................................... 145
Execution ..................................................................................................................................... 146
Server Contact.............................................................................................................................. 147
Startup/Shutdown......................................................................................................................... 148
Scan Config.................................................................................................................................. 149
Display ......................................................................................................................................... 149
Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................... 150
Adapters ....................................................................................................................................... 151
Status............................................................................................................................................ 154
eXpress Scan ........................................................................................................ 155
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
viii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 4 SCANNER
159
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 159
Barcode Processing Overview ............................................................................ 159
Barcode Manipulation .......................................................................................... 160
Main Tab...............................................................................................................................161
COM Port Tabs.....................................................................................................................162
Barcode Tab..........................................................................................................................163
Buttons ...............................................................................................................................163
Enable Code ID ..................................................................................................................164
Barcode – Symbology Settings ..........................................................................................165
Strip Leading/Trailing Control .................................................................................................... 167
Barcode Data Match List ............................................................................................................. 168
Barcode Data Edit Buttons .......................................................................................................................168
Match List Rules ......................................................................................................................................169
Add Prefix/Suffix Control ........................................................................................................................170
Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping...................................................................................................... 171
Translate All .............................................................................................................................................171
Barcode – Custom Identifiers ...................................................................................................... 172
Control Code Replacement Examples ......................................................................................... 174
Barcode Processing Examples ..................................................................................................... 175
Length Based Barcode Stripping ........................................................................ 176
Screen Blanking.................................................................................................... 178
Operation ..............................................................................................................................179
CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION
181
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 181
Summit Radio........................................................................................................ 182
Summit Client Utility ...........................................................................................................183
Help ....................................................................................................................................183
Summit Tray Icon...............................................................................................................184
Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio .........................................................184
Main Tab ............................................................................................................................185
Admin Login................................................................................................................................ 186
Auto Profile.................................................................................................................................. 187
Profile Tab..........................................................................................................................188
Using the Scan Feature ................................................................................................................ 189
Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 190
Status Tab...........................................................................................................................193
Diags Tab ...........................................................................................................................194
Global Tab..........................................................................................................................195
Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 195
Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials ............................................................................................201
Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path ............................................................................203
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
ix
User Certificates.................................................................................................................203
Root CA Certificates ..........................................................................................................203
Summit Wireless Security ....................................................................................................205
No Security.........................................................................................................................206
WEP....................................................................................................................................207
LEAP without WPA Authentication ..................................................................................208
PEAP/MSCHAP.................................................................................................................210
PEAP/GTC .........................................................................................................................212
WPA/LEAP ........................................................................................................................214
EAP-FAST .........................................................................................................................216
EAP-TLS ............................................................................................................................218
WPA PSK...........................................................................................................................220
Cisco Radio ........................................................................................................... 221
Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU) ................................................................................221
Profiles Tab.................................................................................................................................. 222
No Security...............................................................................................................................................222
WEP .........................................................................................................................................................223
LEAP........................................................................................................................................................223
Firmware Tab............................................................................................................................... 224
Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 224
Statistics Tab................................................................................................................................ 224
Survey Tab................................................................................................................................... 224
Configuring for WPA ...........................................................................................................225
System Requirements .........................................................................................................225
Installing Radio drivers ......................................................................................................225
Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant.................................................................................... 226
Wireless Network Configuration .......................................................................................228
PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration ...............................................................231
Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant ............................................................................ 231
Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 233
PEAP/ GTC Authentication Configuration........................................................................234
Configuring the PEAP / GTC Supplicant .................................................................................... 234
Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 236
WPA/LEAP ........................................................................................................................239
Cisco ACU ................................................................................................................................... 239
EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration............................................................................242
User Certificate ............................................................................................................................ 242
Setting EAP/TLS Parameters....................................................................................................... 243
Validating the Server Certificate.................................................................................................. 245
WPA PSK Configuration ...................................................................................................246
Symbol Radio ........................................................................................................ 247
IP Information Tab ...............................................................................................................247
IPv6 Information Tab ...........................................................................................................247
Wireless Information Tab .....................................................................................................248
View Log............................................................................................................................248
Add a new connection ........................................................................................................249
Select a User Certificate.....................................................................................................250
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
x
Table of Contents
Certificates ............................................................................................................ 251
Root Certificates ...................................................................................................................251
Generating a Root CA Certificate ......................................................................................251
Installing a Root CA Certificate.........................................................................................253
User Certificates ...................................................................................................................255
Generating a User Certificate.............................................................................................255
Installing a User Certificate ...............................................................................................260
CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK
265
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 265
Determining Your AppLock Version ...................................................................................266
Multi-Application AppLock...............................................................................................266
Single Application AppLock..............................................................................................267
Setup a New Device .............................................................................................. 268
Administration Mode ............................................................................................ 269
End User Mode...................................................................................................... 269
Passwords ............................................................................................................. 270
End-User Switching Technique ........................................................................... 271
Using a Stylus Tap................................................................................................................271
Using the Switch Key Sequence...........................................................................................271
Application Configuration .................................................................................... 272
Application Panel .................................................................................................................272
Launch Button ....................................................................................................................275
Auto At Boot................................................................................................................................ 275
Auto Re-Launch........................................................................................................................... 276
Manual (Launch).......................................................................................................................... 276
Allow Close ................................................................................................................................. 276
Match ........................................................................................................................................... 277
End User Internet Explorer (EUIE)....................................................................................277
Security Panel .......................................................................................................................278
Password.............................................................................................................................279
Options Panel........................................................................................................................279
Launch timeout...................................................................................................................279
Replace timeout..................................................................................................................279
Restart timeout ...................................................................................................................279
Status Panel...........................................................................................................................280
View ...................................................................................................................................280
Log .....................................................................................................................................281
Save As...............................................................................................................................281
Troubleshooting AppLock ................................................................................... 282
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
APPENDIX A KEY MAPS
xi
283
The VX6 Keypad .................................................................................................... 283
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies.......................................................................... 283
IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad .................................................................. 288
IBM 5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad .................................................................. 288
APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
289
Physical Specifications ........................................................................................ 289
Environmental Specifications.............................................................................. 290
Display Specifications ..........................................................................................................291
UPS Battery Pack Specifications..........................................................................................291
Network Device Specifications ............................................................................ 292
Summit 802.11b/g CF 2.4GHz .............................................................................................292
Summit 802.11a/b/g CF 2.4/5.0GHz ....................................................................................292
Bluetooth...............................................................................................................................292
PCMCIA Cisco 2.4GHz Type II ..........................................................................................293
PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II.............................................................................293
APPENDIX C VX6 CE .NET 4.2
295
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 295
Windows CE . NET 4.2 Operating System........................................................... 295
Wireless Network Configuration..........................................................................................295
Warmboot .............................................................................................................................295
Coldboot ...............................................................................................................................295
Installed Software ................................................................................................. 296
Software Load.......................................................................................................................296
Software Applications ........................................................................................................296
Java (Optional) ...................................................................................................................297
LXE RFTerm (Optional) ....................................................................................................297
AppLock.............................................................................................................................297
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) ...........................................................................297
Desktop.................................................................................................................. 299
Folders Copies at Startup......................................................................................................300
My Computer Folders...........................................................................................................300
Start Menu Program Options ............................................................................... 301
Communication.....................................................................................................................302
ActiveSync .........................................................................................................................302
Connect...............................................................................................................................303
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
xii
Table of Contents
Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server ...................................................................................303
Command Prompt .................................................................................................................304
Internet Explorer...................................................................................................................304
Media Player.........................................................................................................................304
Remote Desktop Connection ................................................................................................305
Transcriber............................................................................................................................305
Windows Explorer ................................................................................................................305
Taskbar .................................................................................................................................306
Advanced Tab ....................................................................................................................306
Control Panel Options .......................................................................................... 307
About ....................................................................................................................................308
Language and Fonts ...........................................................................................................309
Identifying Software Versions ...........................................................................................310
Radio MAC Address ..........................................................................................................310
Accessibility .........................................................................................................................311
Administrator Control...........................................................................................................312
Bluetooth...............................................................................................................................312
Certificates............................................................................................................................312
Date/Time .............................................................................................................................313
Dialing ..................................................................................................................................314
Display..................................................................................................................................315
Background ........................................................................................................................315
Appearance.........................................................................................................................315
Backlight ............................................................................................................................315
Input Panel ............................................................................................................................316
Internet Options ....................................................................................................................317
Keyboard...............................................................................................................................317
Mixer.....................................................................................................................................318
Mouse ...................................................................................................................................319
Network and Dialup Connections.........................................................................................319
Owner ...................................................................................................................................320
Password ...............................................................................................................................321
PC Connection ......................................................................................................................322
PCMCIA ...............................................................................................................................323
Power ....................................................................................................................................324
Regional Settings ..................................................................................................................325
Remove Programs.................................................................................................................325
Scanner .................................................................................................................................325
Storage Manager...................................................................................................................325
Stylus ....................................................................................................................................326
Double Tap.........................................................................................................................326
Calibration..........................................................................................................................326
System...................................................................................................................................327
General ...............................................................................................................................327
Memory ..............................................................................................................................328
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
xiii
Device Name ......................................................................................................................328
Copyrights ..........................................................................................................................328
Volume and Sounds..............................................................................................................329
APPENDIX D REFERENCE MATERIAL
331
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 331
AppLock Error Messages..................................................................................... 332
AppLock Registry Settings .................................................................................. 341
Valid VK Codes for CE.......................................................................................... 342
ASCII Control Codes............................................................................................. 343
Hat Encoding......................................................................................................... 345
Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart............................................................................... 347
Revision History.................................................................................................... 349
INDEX
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
355
VX6 Reference Guide
xiv
Table of Contents
Illustrations
Figure 1-1 VX6 Components, Top View.............................................................................................................6
Figure 1-2 VX6 Components, Front View...........................................................................................................6
Figure 1-3 VX6 Components, Bottom View .......................................................................................................7
Figure 1-4 VX6 Components, Back View ...........................................................................................................7
Figure 1-5 VX6 Control Panel.............................................................................................................................8
Figure 1-6 VX6 Access Panel..............................................................................................................................8
Figure 1-7 ActiveSync Explore .........................................................................................................................13
Figure 1-8 LXEConnect Installation Files .........................................................................................................14
Figure 1-9 LXEConnect Setup...........................................................................................................................14
Figure 1-10 LXEConnect Notice .......................................................................................................................15
Figure 1-11 LXEConnect Desktop ....................................................................................................................15
Figure 1-12 Bluetooth Devices Display – Before Discovering Devices............................................................17
Figure 1-13 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label.....................................................................................21
Figure 1-14 About tab and Bluetooth Address ..................................................................................................22
Figure 2-1 VX6 Hardware Configuration..........................................................................................................30
Figure 2-2 The Power (On/Off) Switch .............................................................................................................35
Figure 2-3 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1) ..................................................................................................37
Figure 2-4 Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3) ..............................................................................................38
Figure 2-5 Pinout – Serial Cable........................................................................................................................39
Figure 2-6 Pinout – Screen Blanking Cable.......................................................................................................40
Figure 2-7 Sample Cable for Screen Blanking ..................................................................................................40
Figure 2-8 VX6 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector................................................41
Figure 2-9 VX6 Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables ..................................................................................................42
Figure 2-10 D15 Female Connector...................................................................................................................43
Figure 2-11 Dongle Cable USB Host Port.........................................................................................................44
Figure 2-12 Dongle Cable USB Client Port.......................................................................................................44
Figure 2-13 Dongle Cable Ethernet Port............................................................................................................45
Figure 2-14 VX6 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones..................................................................46
Figure 2-15 The Power Connector.....................................................................................................................47
Figure 2-16 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connector.........................................................................................48
Figure 2-17 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connector ......................................................................................48
Figure 2-18 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector ......................................................................49
Figure 2-19 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector....................................................................49
Figure 2-20 External Antenna............................................................................................................................50
Figure 2-21 RF Antenna SS Connector .............................................................................................................50
Figure 2-22 Internal Antenna Cables .................................................................................................................51
Figure 2-23 QWERTY Keyboard Standard.......................................................................................................52
Figure 2-24 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 3270 Overlay ..............................................................................52
Figure 2-25 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 5250 Overlay ..............................................................................52
Figure 2-26 Keyboard LEDs..............................................................................................................................54
Figure 2-27 The CapsLock Key.........................................................................................................................54
Figure 2-28 The Secondary Key ........................................................................................................................55
Figure 2-29 The VMT Keyboard Display Controls...........................................................................................56
Figure 2-30 Small and Large Virtual Keyboards...............................................................................................58
Figure 2-31 Input Panel Properties ....................................................................................................................59
Figure 2-32 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots ........................................................................................................61
Figure 2-33 Inserting the Type II PCMCIA Radio ............................................................................................63
Figure 2-34 Summit 802.11 a/b/g Antenna Cable Connections.........................................................................64
Figure 2-35 Summit 802.11b/g Antenna Cable Connections ............................................................................65
Figure 2-36 Cisco Antenna Cable Connections .................................................................................................65
Figure 2-37 Symbol 11Mb Antenna Cable Connections ...................................................................................66
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
xv
Figure 2-38 Inserting the CF ATA Card............................................................................................................67
Figure 2-39 Inserting the SD ATA Card............................................................................................................68
Figure 2-40 Optional Power Supply Cable ........................................................................................................69
Figure 2-41 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable (12 Ft.)...........................................................................71
Figure 2-42 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle...................................................................................71
Figure 2-43 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes.......................................................................................71
Figure 2-44 Power Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 to VX6.........................................................................................72
Figure 2-45 Fuse Replacement ..........................................................................................................................73
Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen ............................................................................................................84
Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties............................................................................................................................86
Figure 3-3 About Properties, Software ..............................................................................................................89
Figure 3-4 About Properties, Versions ..............................................................................................................90
Figure 3-5 About Properties, Network IP ..........................................................................................................90
Figure 3-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard ..................................................................................................91
Figure 3-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound........................................................................................................91
Figure 3-8 Control Panel - Bluetooth.................................................................................................................94
Figure 3-9 Discover Bluetooth Devices.............................................................................................................94
Figure 3-10 Bluetooth Devices Panel ................................................................................................................95
Figure 3-11 Bluetooth Device Disconnect / Delete ...........................................................................................96
Figure 3-12 Bluetooth Device Properties Menu ................................................................................................96
Figure 3-13 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel ....................................................................................................97
Figure 3-14 Bluetooth About Panel ...................................................................................................................98
Figure 3-15 Date/Time Properties....................................................................................................................100
Figure 3-16 Dialing..........................................................................................................................................101
Figure 3-17 Display Properties / Backlight Tab ..............................................................................................102
Figure 3-18 Input Panel Properties ..................................................................................................................103
Figure 3-19 KeyPad Properties / KeyMap Tab................................................................................................106
Figure 3-20 KeyMap Properties / LaunchApp Tab .........................................................................................107
Figure 3-21 KeyMap Properties / RunCmd Tab ..............................................................................................108
Figure 3-22 Mixer ............................................................................................................................................110
Figure 3-23 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Communication Tab ..............................................................111
Figure 3-24 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Misc Tab................................................................................112
Figure 3-25 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Status Popup Tab...................................................................113
Figure 3-26 Network Connection Properties ...................................................................................................114
Figure 3-27 Owner Properties..........................................................................................................................115
Figure 3-28 Password Properties .....................................................................................................................116
Figure 3-29 Communication / PC Connection Tab..........................................................................................117
Figure 3-30 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1 .....................................................................................118
Figure 3-31 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2.....................................................................................118
Figure 3-32 Power Properties ..........................................................................................................................119
Figure 3-33 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start..........................................................................................121
Figure 3-34 Stylus Properties / Recalibration ..................................................................................................121
Figure 3-35 System / General tab ....................................................................................................................122
Figure 3-36 System / Memory .........................................................................................................................123
Figure 3-37 System / Device Name .................................................................................................................123
Figure 3-38 Volume and Sounds .....................................................................................................................124
Figure 3-39 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization ...................................................................................131
Figure 3-40 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen.............................................................................................142
Figure 3-41 Connection Options......................................................................................................................145
Figure 3-42 Execution Options (Dimmed) ......................................................................................................146
Figure 3-43 Server Contact Options ................................................................................................................147
Figure 3-44 Startup / Shutdown Options .........................................................................................................148
Figure 3-45 Scan Config Option......................................................................................................................149
Figure 3-46 Window Display Options.............................................................................................................149
Figure 3-47 Application Shortcuts...................................................................................................................150
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
xvi
Table of Contents
Figure 3-48 Adapter Options – Network .........................................................................................................151
Figure 3-49 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed..........................................................................................152
Figure 3-50 Manual Settings Properties Panels ...............................................................................................153
Figure 3-51 Status Display...............................................................................................................................154
Figure 3-52 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon..........................................................................................................155
Figure 3-53 eXpress Scan Password Input ......................................................................................................155
Figure 3-54 Scan Barcode 1.............................................................................................................................156
Figure 3-55 Scan Remaining Barcodes............................................................................................................156
Figure 2-56 Configuring Settings ....................................................................................................................157
Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main Tab ...........................................................................................................161
Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab...................................................................................................162
Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Barcode tab .......................................................................................................163
Figure 4-4 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings ...............................................................................................165
Figure 4-5 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls .....................................................................................................167
Figure 4-6 Barcode Data Match List................................................................................................................168
Figure 4-7 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls ............................................................................................................170
Figure 4-8 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping.................................................................................................171
Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers .................................................................................................173
Figure 4-10 AIM Custom IDs..........................................................................................................................176
Figure 4-11 AIM Custom Setup for C1 ...........................................................................................................177
Figure 4-12 Barcode Match Data for C1 .........................................................................................................177
Figure 4-13 Enable Screen Blanking ...............................................................................................................178
Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility .....................................................................................................................183
Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab ............................................................................................................................185
Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry ..................................................................................................................186
Figure 5-4 Select Profiles for Auto Profile ......................................................................................................187
Figure 5-5 SCU – Profile Tab..........................................................................................................................188
Figure 5-6 Scan................................................................................................................................................189
Figure 5-7 SCU – Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................193
Figure 5-8 SCU – Diags Tab ...........................................................................................................................194
Figure 5-9 SCU – Global Tab..........................................................................................................................195
Figure 5-10 Sign-On Screen ............................................................................................................................202
Figure 5-11 Choose Certificate ........................................................................................................................204
Figure 5-12 Default Profile..............................................................................................................................205
Figure 5-13 No Security...................................................................................................................................206
Figure 5-14 WEP Encryption...........................................................................................................................207
Figure 5-15 WEP Keys ....................................................................................................................................207
Figure 5-16 LEAP Configuration ....................................................................................................................208
Figure 5-17 LEAP Credentials.........................................................................................................................209
Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP ..........................................................................................................................210
Figure 5-19 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials .......................................................................................................210
Figure 5-20 PEAP/MSCHAP Certificate Filename .........................................................................................211
Figure 5-21 PEAP/GTC...................................................................................................................................212
Figure 5-22 PEAP/GTC Credentials................................................................................................................212
Figure 5-23 PEAP/GTC Certificate Filename .................................................................................................213
Figure 5-24 WPA/LEAP..................................................................................................................................214
Figure 5-25 WPA/LEAP Credentials...............................................................................................................215
Figure 5-26 EAP-FAST Configuration............................................................................................................216
Figure 5-27 EAP-FAST Credentials ................................................................................................................217
Figure 5-28 EAP-TLS......................................................................................................................................218
Figure 5-29 EAP-TLS Credentials...................................................................................................................218
Figure 5-30 EAP-TLS Credentials...................................................................................................................219
Figure 5-31 WPA/PSK Encryption..................................................................................................................220
Figure 5-32 PSK Entry ....................................................................................................................................220
Figure 5-33 Cisco Aironet Client Utility .........................................................................................................221
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Table of Contents
xvii
Figure 5-34 Cisco Profile Properties Screen....................................................................................................222
Figure 5-35 Cisco Profile WEP Keys ..............................................................................................................223
Figure 5-36 No Cisco PEAP .............................................................................................................................226
Figure 5-37 Cisco PEAP installed. ...................................................................................................................226
Figure 5-38 Cisco ACU Profile Selection........................................................................................................228
Figure 5-39 Cisco ACU Reboot Message........................................................................................................228
Figure 5-40 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon............................................................................................228
Figure 5-41 Wireless Information Screen........................................................................................................229
Figure 5-42 Advanced Wireless Settings.........................................................................................................229
Figure 5-43 Wireless Network Properties........................................................................................................230
Figure 5-44 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties ...........................................................................231
Figure 5-45 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................231
Figure 5-46 Wireless Network Login ..............................................................................................................232
Figure 5-47 IP Information Tab.......................................................................................................................232
Figure 5-48 Authentication Settings, Validate Server .....................................................................................233
Figure 5-49 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID.......................................................................233
Figure 5-50 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties....................................................................................234
Figure 5-51 PEAP Properties...........................................................................................................................234
Figure 5-52 Login Screen ................................................................................................................................235
Figure 5-53 IP Information Tab.......................................................................................................................235
Figure 5-54 PEAP Properties, Validate Server Certificate ..............................................................................236
Figure 5-55 Server Connection Warning.........................................................................................................236
Figure 5-56 PEAP Properties, Trusted Root Certificate ..................................................................................237
Figure 5-57 Accept Server Connection Warning.............................................................................................237
Figure 5-58 PEAP Properties, Connect Only If Server Name Ends In............................................................238
Figure 5-59 Wireless Information, Authenticated ...........................................................................................238
Figure 5-60 ACU Profile Tab ..........................................................................................................................239
Figure 5-61 Renaming Profile ..........................................................................................................................239
Figure 5-62 Profile Properties Screen..............................................................................................................240
Figure 5-63 Select Profile ................................................................................................................................240
Figure 5-64 Login Screen ................................................................................................................................241
Figure 5-65 ACU Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................241
Figure 5-66 Certificate Stores ..........................................................................................................................242
Figure 5-67 View Certificate Details ...............................................................................................................242
Figure 5-68 EAP/TLS Configuration...............................................................................................................243
Figure 5-69 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................243
Figure 5-70 Select Certificate ..........................................................................................................................244
Figure 5-71 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details .................................................................................244
Figure 5-72 Validate Server.............................................................................................................................245
Figure 5-73 SSID Authenticated......................................................................................................................245
Figure 5-74 WPA PSK Configuration .............................................................................................................246
Figure 5-75 Symbol NETWLAN Screen.........................................................................................................247
Figure 5-76 Symbol Wireless Information Tab ...............................................................................................248
Figure 5-77 Symbol Wireless Network Properties ..........................................................................................249
Figure 5-78 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings ...........................................................................................250
Figure 5-79 Logon to Certificate Authority.....................................................................................................251
Figure 5-80 Certificate Services Welcome Screen ..........................................................................................251
Figure 5-81 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................252
Figure 5-82 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................252
Figure 5-83 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................253
Figure 5-84 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................253
Figure 5-85 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................254
Figure 5-86 Certificate Import Confirmation...................................................................................................254
Figure 5-87 Logon to Certificate Authority.....................................................................................................255
Figure 5-88 Certificate Services Welcome Screen ..........................................................................................255
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
xviii
Table of Contents
Figure 5-89 Request a Certificate Screen ........................................................................................................256
Figure 5-90 Advanced Certificate Request Screen ..........................................................................................256
Figure 5-91 Advanced Certificate Details .......................................................................................................257
Figure 5-92 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................258
Figure 5-93 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................258
Figure 5-94 Certificate Issued..........................................................................................................................259
Figure 5-95 Download Security Warning........................................................................................................259
Figure 5-96 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................260
Figure 5-97 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................260
Figure 5-98 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................261
Figure 5-99 Certificate Listing.........................................................................................................................261
Figure 5-100 Private Key Not Present .............................................................................................................262
Figure 5-101 Browsing to Private Key Location .............................................................................................262
Figure 5-102 Private Key Present ....................................................................................................................263
Figure 6-1 Multi-Application AppLock...........................................................................................................266
Figure 6-2 Single-Application AppLock .........................................................................................................267
Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu.............................................................................................................................271
Figure 6-4 Application Panel ...........................................................................................................................272
Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options ..........................................................................................................275
Figure 6-6 Security Panel.................................................................................................................................278
Figure 6-7 Options Panel .................................................................................................................................279
Figure 6-8 Status Panel ....................................................................................................................................280
Figure A-1 VX6 QWERTY Keyboard ............................................................................................................283
Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................288
Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................288
Figure C-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen..........................................................................................................304
Figure C-2 Taskbar Properties .........................................................................................................................306
Figure C-3 About Properties, Software ...........................................................................................................309
Figure C-4 About Properties, Versions............................................................................................................310
Figure C-5 About Properties, Network IP .......................................................................................................310
Figure C-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard ...............................................................................................311
Figure C-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound .....................................................................................................311
Figure C-8 Date/Time Properties .....................................................................................................................313
Figure C-9 Dialing ...........................................................................................................................................314
Figure C-10 Display Properties / Backlight Tab..............................................................................................315
Figure C-11 Input Panel Properties..................................................................................................................316
Figure C-12 Mixer ...........................................................................................................................................318
Figure C-13 Network Connection Properties...................................................................................................319
Figure C-14 Owner Properties .........................................................................................................................320
Figure C-15 Password Properties.....................................................................................................................321
Figure C-16 Communication / PC Connection Tab .........................................................................................322
Figure C-17 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1.....................................................................................323
Figure C-18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2 ....................................................................................323
Figure C-19 Power Properties..........................................................................................................................324
Figure C-20 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start.........................................................................................326
Figure C-21 Stylus Properties / Recalibration .................................................................................................326
Figure C-22 System / General tab....................................................................................................................327
Figure C-23 System / Memory.........................................................................................................................328
Figure C-24 System / Device Name.................................................................................................................328
Figure C-25 Volume and Sounds.....................................................................................................................329
Figure D-1 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal) ........................................................................347
Figure D-2 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal) ....................................................................348
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 1 Introduction
Overview
The VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer (VMC) is a rugged, vehicle mounted, PC (Personal
Computer) running a Microsoft® Windows® CE operating system and capable of wireless data
communications from a fork-lift truck or any properly configured vehicle. The VX6 provides
power and functionality in a vehicle mounted unit, with a wide range of options:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
CPU
400MHz Intel® PXA255
Memory
128MB DRAM
Display
Indoor or Outdoor half screen display, integrated Touchscreen,
adjustable brightness
Network
connectivity
Wireless LAN radio (single or dual antenna)
Ethernet port
Optional Bluetooth module
Audio
Speakers in front bezel, audio jack for headset with microphone
Storage media
Compact Flash
PCMCIA
Secure Digital (SD)
Operating
system
Microsoft Windows CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5.0
Other options
Extended temperature version
RAM MountTM vehicle mounting
VX6 Reference Guide
2
When to Use this Guide
When to Use this Guide
The “VX6 User’s Guide” is directed toward the VX6 user. It is delivered on the LXE
Documentation CD. It contains safety warnings, descriptions of the controls and
connectors, instruction on installing antennas, and day to day operation.
As the reference for LXE’s VX6 equipped with a Microsoft Windows CE operating system, this
guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality. Use this guide as you would
any other source book -- reading portions to learn about the VX6, and then referring to it when
you need more information about a particular subject.
This chapter, “Introduction”, briefly describes this reference guide structure, contains setup and
installation instruction, briefly describes data entry processes, and explains how to get help.
Chapter 2 “Physical Description and Layout” describes the function and layout of the controls
and connectors on the VX6. Describes AC power and DC power connections.
Chapter 3 “System Configuration” takes you through the system setup and file structure,
covering all components except the wireless network, AppLock and Scanner.
Chapter 4 “Scanner” contains information on the scanner keyboard wedge, active scanner port,
and COM port settings such as baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits.
Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” details radio setup. Configuration for WEP and
WPA is included.
Chapter 6, “AppLock” contains explanation and instruction when working with VX6’s running
AppLock.
Appendix A “Key Maps” describes the keypress sequences for the VX6 keyboard.
Appendix B “Technical Specifications” lists technical specifications including physical,
environmental, display and the radios.
Appendix C “VX6 CE .NET 4.2” takes you through the Windows CE .NET 4.2 system setup
and files structure.
Appendix D, “Reference Material” includes parameter programming charts and other reference
information.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
When to Use this Guide
3
Document Conventions
This reference guide uses the following document conventions:
ALL CAPS
Menu | Choice
“Quotes”
<
>
All caps are used to represent disk directories, file names, and application
names.
Rather than use the phrase “choose the Save command from the File menu”,
this guide uses the convention “choose File | Save”.
Indicates the title of a book, chapter or a section within a chapter (for example,
“Document Conventions”).
Indicates a key on the keyboard (for example, <Enter> ).
Indicates a reference to other documentation.
P
S
ATTENTION
!
Differences in operation or commands due to platform type.
Differences in operation or commands due to software revision.
Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow.
Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Also,
when marked on product, means to refer to the manual or user’s guide.
International fuse replacement symbol. When marked on the product, the label
includes fuse ratings in volts (v) and amperes (a) for the product.
Note:
Caution
!
WARNING
!
DANGER
!
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information.
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury.
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Keyword that indicates an imminent hazardous situation, which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
VX6 Reference Guide
4
Quick Start
Quick Start
This section’s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre-configured
and requires only accessory installation (e.g. antenna, external keyboard and/or barcode scanner)
and a power source.
In general, the sequence of events is:
1.
Install Vehicle Mounting Bracket on vehicle and secure VX6 in Mounting Bracket
Assembly (see “VX6 User’s Guide”).
2.
Connect power cable to the VX6. The power cable can also be connected to a UPS
battery pack, which is then connected to the VX6 (see “VX6 User’s Guide”).
3.
Connect accessories to VX6, e.g. scanner, antenna, etc. (see “VX6 User’s Guide).
4.
Secure all cables to the VX6 with the Strain Relief Cable Clamps.
5.
Turn the VX6 on.
6.
When instructed, calibrate the touchscreen (see Chapter 3, “System Configuration”).
7.
The screen may appear white while applications and drivers are loading. When
complete, set Date and Time (see Chapter 3, “System Configuration”).
8.
Pair Bluetooth devices.
9.
Configure radio (see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”).
10. Warmboot to ensure all registry settings are saved.
11. Device is ready for use.
The VX6 should be mounted in an area in the vehicle where it:
•
Does not obstruct the vehicle driver’s vision or safe vehicle operation.
•
Can be easily accessed by anyone seated in the driver’s seat.
Troubleshooting
Can’t calibrate the
touch screen, change
the date/time or
adjust the volume.
AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device. AppLock
restricts User access to running programs. Changes or modifications
require Administrator access.
Refer to “Chapter 6 – AppLock” for setup and processing information.
RFTerm opens and
runs upon each cold
reset and warm reset.
Tap File | Exit to close the RFTerm application.
VX6 seems to lockup
as soon as it is
warmbooted.
There may be small delays while the wireless client connects to the
network, authorization for Voxware-enabled applications complete,
Wavelink Avalanche management of the VX6 startup completes, and
Bluetooth relationships establish or re-establish.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Quick Start
5
Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key
See Also:
Chapter 6 “AppLock”.
Hotkey (Activation hotkey)
If the mobile device uses LXE’s Multi AppLock to allow the user to switch between applications,
the default Activation key is Ctrl+Spc. The key sequence switches the focus between one
application and another. Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only. Note
that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching
applications.
Touch
Note:
The touch panel must be enabled.
Tap the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen. Tap one of the application icons in the
popup menu. The selected application is brought to the foreground while the other application
continues to run in the background. Stylus taps affect the application running in the foreground
only.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
6
Components
Components
1
1
Access Panel Cover (See
Following Illustrations for
Detail)
2
Antenna Connectors or
Hole Plugs
2
Figure 1-1 VX6 Components, Top View
1
1. Speakers
2
2. Control Panel
(See Following
Illustrations for Detail)
3
3. 2nd Indicator
4
4. Caps Lock Indicator
VX6
Figure 1-2 VX6 Components, Front View
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Components
7
1. COM1/Scanner
Connector
2. COM3 Connector
IP66
LISTED
I.T.E.
REFER TO
MANUAL
N107
C
UL
®
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
US
E-130794
CAUTION: For continues protection against risk of fire,
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICE-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est
confirme là norme NMB-003 du Canada
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromette la preotection
contre les risques d'incendie, remplacer par un fusible
de mmes
ê
types de mmes
ê caractristques
é
nominales.
PRODUCT OF U.S.A. U.S. PATENT 5862393
AUDIO
3. Keyboard/Mouse
Connector (Not Used)
INPUT:
12-80VDC
6A 72W
COM1 / SCANNER
COM2/3
KEYBOARD /
MOUSE
ETHERNET /
USB
T10A, 125V
4. Ethernet/USB Cable
Connector (USB-Host and
USB-Client)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5. Fuse
6. Audio Connector
7. Power Cable Connector
Figure 1-3 VX6 Components, Bottom View
Note:
COM1 is configured with Pin 9 +5V. COM3 is labeled “COM2/3” and is configured
with Pin 9 RI. Please see Chapter 4, “Scanner”, for details on configuring Pin 9 of the
serial ports.
1
1. Antenna Connectors
2
2. Bracket Mounting Area
3. Strain Relief Bracket and
Screws
3
Figure 1-4 VX6 Components, Back View
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
8
Components
1
2
3
1. Power LED
2. Power Switch
3. Brightness Increase
4. Brightness
Decrease
4
Figure 1-5 VX6 Control Panel
SD
CF ATA
1. SD Memory Card
Slot
PCMCIA A
PCMCIA B
2. Compact Flash Hard
Drive
1
2
3
3. PCMCIA Slots
Figure 1-6 VX6 Access Panel
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Data Entry
9
Data Entry
You can enter data into the VX6 through several different methods. A tethered scanner connected
to the COM1 serial port provides barcode data entry, the serial ports are used to input/output data,
keyboards provide manual entry and the touchscreen also provides manual entry (simulating a
desktop PC’s mouse).
Keyboard Data Entry
Refer to Appendix A “Key Maps” for 101-key keyboard equivalent keypresses.
The keyboard is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise. Almost any function
that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the VX6 keyboard but it may
take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task.
Almost every key has two or three different functions. The primary alpha or numeric character is
printed on the key.
For example, when the <2nd> key is selected pressing the desired second-function key produces
the <2nd> character i.e. <2nd> + <F1> toggles the CAPS Lock function. The specific <2nd>
character is printed above the corresponding key.
Please refer to Appendix A “Key Maps” for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all
PC-compatible keyboard functions.
Tethered Scanners
The VX6 supports an accessory barcode label reading device. Keyboard data entries can be mixed
with barcode data entries. Any scanner that decodes the barcode internally and outputs an RS-232
data stream may be used. COM port 1 is designed to be used with a hand held tethered barcode
scanner.
COM1 is set to +5V on pin 9 up to accept input from a barcode scanner by default. To change
the setting for pin 9, refer to Chapter 4: “Scanner” section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for details.
Bluetooth Scanners
Bluetooth scanners are paired to the VX6 wirelessly using the VX6 Bluetooth wireless client. The
VX6 does not have a Bluetooth LED.
See following section “Bluetooth” for more information.
Only LXE Bluetooth scanners and LXE Bluetooth printers are supported by LXE. See
Accessories.
RS-232 Data Entry
The VX6 accepts input from an RS-232 device connected to either RS-232 port, COM1 or COM3
(labeled “COM2/3”). The data is entered at the cursor position, and the data is subject to all of the
barcode/RS-232 input menu parameters, such as truncate.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
10
Data Entry
Touchscreen Entry
Note:
The touchscreen should be calibrated before initial use. See “Touchscreen Calibration”
in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
Note:
Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use
an actual pen, pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen.
The touchscreen input performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click
elements on a desktop computer. A stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse – single tap or
double tap to select menu options, drag the stylus across text to select, hold the stylus down to
activate slider bars, etcetera.
Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the
stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. The touchscreen responds to an actuation force
(touch) of up to 4 oz. of pressure.
The touchscreen can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input/output
device connected to one of the VX6’s serial ports.
Note:
•
Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed.
•
The cursor begins to flash in the field.
•
The unit is ready to accept data from either the keyboard or a device connected to a
serial port.
The touchscreen may be disabled. Please refer to “MX3-VXC Options” in Chapter 3,
“System Configuration” for details.
Right Click
A right click can be simulated on the touchscreen. To perform a right click, touch the touchscreen
with the stylus and hold it in the same location for a short time.
Note:
Some applications may not support this right click method. Please review documentation
for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration.
Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)
Data may be entered via the input panel (virtual keyboard) on the touchscreen. For more details
on the input panel, please refer to Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Data Entry
11
Touchscreen and Mouse
The behavior of the mouse pointer on the touchscreen varies by VX6 construction.
To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, in
Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”.
P
Platform 1 VX6’s
Because the touchscreen also functions as a mouse, the pointer for a USB mouse may not always
be visible on the screen. The mouse pointer reappears when the USB mouse is moved or clicked.
•
When a USB mouse is first attached to the VX6, the mouse pointer may not be
visible. However, moving or clicking the mouse causes the pointer to appear.
•
When the USB mouse is unplugged, the pointer may remain visible until the
touchscreen is tapped.
•
If the touchscreen is used for input, the mouse pointer may disappear. However,
moving or clicking the mouse causes the pointer to reappear.
Platform 2 VX6’s
The mouse pointer is not visible unless a USB mouse is attached.
If a mouse is attached, the mouse pointer is displayed on screen.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
12
Setup the Radio and Network
Setup the Radio and Network
Prerequisites
•
Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point
•
WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys
See “Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for complete information.
Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters
Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know:
•
the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and
•
the port number (Telnet Port) of the host system
to properly set up your host session.
1.
Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are
connecting over wireless LAN, make sure your mobile client is communicating with the
Access Point.
2.
From the Start | Programs, run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop.
3.
Select Session | Configure from the application menu and select the “host type” that you
require. This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e.
3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host.
4.
Enter the “Host Address” of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a
DNS name or an IP address of the host system.
5.
Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific
port. If not, just use the default telnet port.
6.
Select OK
7.
Select Session | Connect from the application menu or tap the “Connect” button on the
Command Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen
displayed.
To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Barcode, etc., please refer to the “RFTerm
Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect
13
Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect
Requirements: ActiveSync version 3.8 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop)
computer. Please see the following section ActiveSync – Initial Setup for more
details on ActiveSync.
ActiveSync is already installed on the VX6. The VX6 is preconfigured to establish a USB
ActiveSync connection to a PC when the proper cable is attached to the VX6 and the PC. If The
VX6 uses a serial port for ActiveSync, it is necessary to configure the VX6 to use the serial port.
Complete details on the proper cables and port configuration are included in the ActiveSync
section later in this chapter.
LXEConnect allows a user to view the VX6 screen remotely from a PC using an ActiveSync
connection.
Install LXEConnect
1.
Install Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.8 or higher on a PC with a USB port. For details,
please see ActiveSync later in this chapter.
2.
Power up the VX6.
3.
Connect the VX6 to the PC using the proper connection cable. Once connected, the
ActiveSync dialog box appears. If using the USB connection, the ActiveSync connection is
automatically established. If using a serial connection, it is necessary to initiate the
connection from the VX6.
4.
Select “No” for partnership when prompted. Dismiss any ActiveSync dialog boxes warning a
partnership is not set up. It is not necessary to establish a partnership to use LXEConnect.
However, if a partnership is desired for other reasons, one may be established now. More
details on partnerships are included in ActiveSync later in this chapter.
5.
When the ActiveSync screen appears, select Explore.
Figure 1-7 ActiveSync Explore
6.
An explorer window is displayed for the VX6. Browse to the \System\LXEConnect folder.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
14
Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect
Figure 1-8 LXEConnect Installation Files
7.
Select and copy the LXEConnect.msi and Setup.exe files from the VX6 to the user PC. Note
the location chosen for files
8.
Close the ActiveSync explorer dialog box.
connection.
9.
Execute the setup.exe file that was copied to the user PC. This setup program installs the
LXEConnect utility.
Do not disconnect the VX6 ActiveSync
Figure 1-9 LXEConnect Setup
10. Follow the on screen installation prompts. The default installation directory is C:\Program
Files\LXE\LXEConnect.
11. When the installation is complete, create a desktop shortcut to the following file: C:\Program
Files\LXE\LXEConnect\LXEConnect.exe. If a different directory was selected during
installation, please substitute the appropriate directory.
12. LXEConnect is now installed and ready to use.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect
15
Using LXEConnect
1.
If an ActiveSync connection is has not been established, connect the VX6 to the PC. Details
on ActiveSync are included in the following section.
2.
Double-click the LXEConnect icon that was created on the desktop.
3.
LXEConnect launches.
Figure 1-10 LXEConnect Notice
4.
Click the OK button to dismiss the About CERDisp dialog box. The dialog box
automatically times out and disappears after approximately 30 seconds.
Figure 1-11 LXEConnect Desktop
5.
The VX6 can now be configured from the LXEConnect window. Input from the PC’s mouse
and keyboard are recognized as if they were attached to the VX6.
6.
When the remote session is completed, terminate the LXEConnect program by selecting File |
Exit or clicking on the X in the upper right hand corner to close the application then
disconnect the ActiveSync cable.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
16
ActiveSync – Initial Setup
ActiveSync – Initial Setup
The following instructions relate to initial setup of ActiveSync. When there is a Connect icon on
the VX6 desktop, this section can be bypassed.
USB Connection
The VX6 is configured to use USB-C by default. No configuration is necessary
Connect the cable to the PC (the host) and to the dongle cable on the VX6 (the client). The
ActiveSync connection is established automatically when the cable is connected.
Cables for USB ActiveSync Connection:
USB Client to PC/Laptop
Dongle cable w/USB-C
connector
9000075CABLE
Also requires a standard USB cable with a type A plug on
one end, and a type B plug on the other.
Serial Connection
Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Click the Change button. From the
popup list, choose the appropriate COM port and baud rate.
This will set up the VX6 to use the USB or designated COM port. Click OK and ensure the check
box for “Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached” is checked.
Click OK to return to the Control Panel.
Note:
By default COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”) is configured to use ActiveSync (Pin 9 = RI).
Please refer to “Serial Port Pin 9” in Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details on configuring
Pin 9 of the serial ports.
Connect
Connect the correct cable to the PC (the host) and the VX6 (the client). Select “Connect” from the
Start Menu on the VX6 (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect).
Note:
Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM
ports to establish a connection for the first time.
Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection:
Serial Client to PC/Laptop
RS-232 9 Pin to 9 Pin
9000A054CBL6D9D9
Radio
Note:
You must establish a partnership with a desktop computer prior to running ActiveSync
on the VX6. The initial partnership must be done using direct serial / USB cable
connection.
Once the relationship is established using the serial port, the ActiveSync link in the Start Menu
gives a choice of connections, one of which is radio.
Select Start | Settings | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync. From the popup list, choose
Network and then click the Connect button.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Bluetooth
17
Bluetooth
Access:
or
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or Bluetooth icon
in taskbar or Bluetooth icon on desktop
Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing
application.
The VX6 default Bluetooth setting is Enabled.
The LXE HX3 Bluetooth® module is designed to Discover and pair with nearby LXE Bluetooth
devices. Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel. All
other Bluetooth devices are ignored.
Prerequisite
The Bluetooth devices (printers and/or scanners) have been setup to allow them
to be “Discovered” and “Connected/Paired”. The SysAdmin is familiar with the
pairing function of the Bluetooth devices.
Figure 1-12 Bluetooth Devices Display – Before Discovering Devices
Initial Use
1.
Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or
on the desktop.
2.
Tap the Settings Tab.
3.
Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings display. The Bluetooth
VX6 default name is determined by the LXE factory installed software version. LXE strongly
urges assigning every VX6 a unique name (up to 32 characters) before Bluetooth Discovery
is initiated.
4.
Check or uncheck the VX6 Bluetooth options on the Settings tab.
5.
Tap the OK button to save your changes or the X button to discard any changes.
See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
18
Bluetooth
Settings Tab | Bluetooth Options
Note:
These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled
or disabled.
As Bluetooth devices pair with the VX6, the name of the device and an icon representing the type
of device is displayed in the Devices window. The icon state changes as the paired Bluetooth
devices connect and disconnect from the VX6. When the Bluetooth devices are disconnected, the
device icon has a red background.
Report when connection lost
A dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying the user the connection between one (or all) of
the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped. This option is enabled by default.
Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen.
Report when reconnected
A dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying the user a connection between one (or all) of
the previously-paired Bluetooth devices is complete. This option is disabled by default.
Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen.
Report failure to reconnect
If the reconnect timeout (30 minutes) expires, a dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying
the end-user the connection between one (or all) of the previously-paired Bluetooth devices has
failed. This option is enabled by default.
Click the OK button to remove the dialog box from the screen.
Computer is connectable
There is no dialog connected to this checkbox. Enable this checkbox when you want the VX6 to
be able to pair with other Bluetooth devices. This option is enabled by default.
Computer is discoverable
There is no dialog connected to this checkbox. Enable this checkbox when you want the VX6 to
be Discovered by other Bluetooth devices. This option is disabled by default.
Prompt if devices request to pair
A dialog box appears on the VX6 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests to pair
with the VX6. This option is disabled by default.
The requesting Bluetooth device does not need to have been Discovered by the VX6 before the
pairing request is received.
Click the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen.
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
In some cases, if a Bluetooth device is already paired this setting cannot be changed. If
this is the case, an error message is displayed and the option is not changed. The
Bluetooth device must be disconnected before changing this setting.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Bluetooth
19
Continuous search
When enabled, the VX6 never stops searching for a device it has paired with once the connection
is broken (such as the paired device entering Suspend mode, going out of range or being turned
off).
When disabled, the VX6 stops searching after one half hour. The search can be restarted by
putting the VX6 through a Suspend/Resume cycle or accessing the Bluetooth control panel.
This option is disabled by default.
Subsequent Use
Note:
Taskbar and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered,
pair, connect and disconnect. A taskbar Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates
Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device. A device icon with a red background
indicates a disconnected paired device.
1.
Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing
application.
2.
Tap the Bluetooth Devices tab.
3.
Tap the Discover button. When the Bluetooth module begins searching for in-range
Bluetooth devices, the button name changes to Stop. Tap the Stop button to cancel the
Discover function at any time.
4.
The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window.
5.
Doubletap a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window to open the device properties menu.
6.
Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX6 to receive scanner data.
7.
Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX6 to send data to the printer.
8.
Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device. Once disconnected, tap Delete to remove the
device name and data from the VX6 Bluetooth Devices list. The device is deleted after the
user taps OK..
9.
Upon successful pairing, the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection.
The reaction may be an audio signal from the device, flashing LED on the device, or a dialog
box is placed on the VX6 display.
10. Whenever the VX6 is turned On, all previously paired, live, Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
are paired, one at a time, with the VX6. If the devices cannot connect to the VX6 before the
re-connect timeout time period expires (default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired
device) there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to
Reconnect is disabled.
See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
20
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Devices
Assumption: The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices
for each VX6. The System Administrator has also enabled / disabled Bluetooth
settings and assigned a Computer Friendly Name for each VX6. See Chapter 3
System Configuration, Bluetooth control panel applet and supported Bluetooth
printers and scanners.
The Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth LED states change as Bluetooth devices are
discovered, pair, connect and disconnect. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices
re-connect with the VX6. Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the
Bluetooth panel. All other Bluetooth devices are ignored.
Taskbar
Icon
Legend
Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth
device(s).
VX6 is not connected to any Bluetooth device.
VX6 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device.
VX6 is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device(s). Connection is
inactive.
Note:
When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode, is turned Off or leaves the VX6
Bluetooth scan range, the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the VX6 is
lost. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the VX6.
See Accessories for supported Bluetooth printers and scanners.
AppLock, if installed, does not stop the end-user from using Bluetooth applications, nor does it
stop authorized Bluetooth-enabled devices from pairing with the VX6 while AppLock is in
control. See Chapter 6 – AppLock for more information.
See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Bluetooth
21
Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup
Please refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturer’s User Guide; it may be available on the
manufacturer’s web site. Contact your LXE representative for Bluetooth product assistance.
Introduction
LXE supports several different types of barcode readers. This section describes the interaction and
setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the VX6 using Bluetooth
functions.
• The VX6 must have the Bluetooth hardware and software installed. An VX6 operating
system upgrade may be required. Contact your LXE representative for details.
• If the VX6 has a Bluetooth address identifier barcode label affixed, then Bluetooth
hardware and software is installed.
• The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner / laser imager battery is fully charged.
• The barcode numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created
nor scanned with a Bluetooth scanner.
• To open the LXEZ Pairing program, tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or
tap the Bluetooth icon on the desktop or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar.
LnkB00440fd01020 - Sample
Figure 1-13 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label
Locate the barcode label, similar to the one shown above, attached to the mobile device. The label
is the Bluetooth address identifier for the VX6.
The mobile Bluetooth scanner / imager requires this information before discovering, pairing,
connecting or disconnecting can occur.
Important: The VX6 Bluetooth address identifier label should remain protected from damage
(rips, tears, spills, soiling, erasure, etc.) at all times. It may be required when pairing, connecting,
and disconnecting new Bluetooth barcode readers.
VX6 with Label
If the VX6 has a Bluetooth address barcode label attached, follow these steps:
1.
Scan the Bluetooth address barcode label, attached to the VX6, with the LXE Bluetooth
mobile scanner.
2.
If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the VX6 Bluetooth label, the devices
are paired. See section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”. If the devices do not
pair successfully, go to the next step.
3.
Open the LXEZ Pairing panel [Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth].
4.
Tap Discover. Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel.
5.
Doubletap the stylus on the Bluetooth scanner. The right-mouse-click menu appears.
6.
Select Pair as Scanner to pair the VX6 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
22
Bluetooth
The devices are paired. The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED
flashes. Refer to the following section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”.
Note:
After scanning the VX6 Bluetooth label, if there is no beep and no LED flash from the
Bluetooth device, the devices are currently paired.
VX6 without Label
If the VX6 Bluetooth address barcode label does not exist, follow these steps to create a unique
Bluetooth address barcode for the VX6:
First, locate the VX6 Bluetooth address by tapping Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth |
About tab.
Figure 1-14 About tab and Bluetooth Address
Next, create a Bluetooth address barcode label for the VX6 1.
The format for the barcode label is as follows:
• Barcode type must be Code 128.
• FNC3 character followed by string Uppercase L, lowercase n, lowercase k, uppercase B
and then the Bluetooth address (12 hex digits, no colons). For example,
LnkB0400fd002031.
Create and print the label.
Scan the VX6 Bluetooth address barcode label with the Bluetooth barcode reader.
The devices are paired. The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED
flashes. Refer to the following section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”.
Note:
1
After scanning the VX6 Bluetooth label, if there is no beep and no LED flash from the
Bluetooth device, the devices are currently paired.
Free barcode creation software is available for download on the World Wide Web. Search
using the keywords “barcode create”.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Bluetooth
23
Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications
Beep Type from Bluetooth Device
Behavior
Acknowledge label
1 beep
Label rejected
2 beeps at low frequency
Transmission error
Beep will sound high-low-high-low
Link successful
Beep will sound low-medium-high
Link unsuccessful
Beep will sound high-low-high-low
LED on Bluetooth Device
Behavior
Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz
Linking in progress
Off
Disconnected or unlinked
Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz
Bluetooth transmission in progress
Yellow LED blinks at the same rate
as the paging beep (1 Hz)
Paging
Green LED blinks once a second
Disabled indication
Upon startup, if the scanner sounds a long tone, this means the scanner has not passed its
automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode. If the scanner is reset, the sequence is repeated.
Contact LXE Support for assistance.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
24
Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off
Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off
Start | Settings | Control Panel | MX3X-VXC Options | Status Popup tab
When the Status popup window is displayed, it is placed on top of the window in focus and hides
any data beneath it. It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key
sequence.
Using the KeyPad control panel (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keypad), the System
Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end-user when they want to
toggle the Status Popup Window on or off. The System Administrator must also assign a Status
Admin key sequence to perform the same function.
Status popup window display options (taskbar icons) are assigned on the Status Popup tab. E.g.
AC Power, ActiveSync, WLAN radio, CapsLock, Network status, Bluetooth status, etc.
Saving Changes to the Registry
The VX6 saves the registry when you:
• Tap the Start | Run then type Warmboot. Tap OK.
• Install Restart in the Start menu by Start | Run then type CTL RESTART=1 and tap the
OK button. Tap Start | Restart.
The registry save process takes 0 – 3 seconds. If nothing has been changed, nothing is saved (e.g.
0 seconds)
The registry is automatically saved every 20 minutes. It is also saved every tenth time the registry
settings are changed. Registry settings are changed when control panel applet (e.g. Date/Time)
parameters are changed by the user and a warm boot was not performed afterward.
When you tap the Start | Run then type Coldboot and tap the OK button, factory default registry
settings are loaded during coldboot. All changes and settings are lost.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Getting Help
25
Getting Help
All LXE manuals are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed/downloaded
from the LXE website. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD.
You can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals
CD, in the file titled “Contacting LXE”. This information is also available on the LXE website
www.lxe.com.
Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this guide are located in the file titled “Glossary” on
the LXE Manuals CD.
Manuals and Accessories
Manuals
The following manuals are available on the LXE Manuals CD:
•
•
•
•
VX6 User’s Guide
RFTerm® Reference Guide
Contacting LXE
LXE Technical Glossary
Accessories
The table below lists the available VX6 accessories.
VX6 Brackets
Bracket, U Style, VX6 VX77
9000021BRACKET
Kit, VXX U-Bracket to VX6 VX7 Adapter
9000022BRACKET
Bracket, RAM Mount VX6 VX7
9000023BRACKET
Bracket, VXX RAM ball on plate
9000028BRACKET
Bracket, RAM Squeeze Mount, VX6 VX7
9000031BRACKET
Bracket, RAM Backup Mounting Plate
9000033PLATE
Data Cables
Cable, Combo D15 to USB and Ethernet Adapter 1 Ft
9000052CABLE
Cable, Combo D15 to USB-H, USB-C and Ethernet Adapter
9000075CABLE
Cable, Printer/PC, D9 to D25
9000053CABLE
Cable, PC, D9 to D9
9000A054CBL6D9D9
Power Cables
Cable, Input Power, 12 FT, VX5 VX6 VX7
9000054CABLE
Adapter Cable, VX1 VX2 VX4 Power Cable to VX5 VX6 VX7
9000077CABLER
Power Supplies
Power Supply, External, AC, W/US Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7
9000A317PSACUS-R
Power Supply, External, AC, No Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7
9000A318PSACWW-R
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
26
Manuals and Accessories
UPS Battery and Cables
Battery, UPS Lead Acid, VX5 VX6 VX7
9000376BATTERY
Cable, UPS Battery, Remote Mount Extender, 6 Ft
9000063CABLE
Antenna and Antenna Mount Kits
Replacement antenna, 2.4GHz
153180-0001
Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 8 Ft Cable, a/b/g
9000283ANTENNA
Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, a/b/g
9000282ANTENNA
Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, a/b/g
9000284ANTENNA
Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 15 Ft Cable, a/b/g
9000285ANTENNA
Miscellaneous
Stylus, with Tethers and Sleeves, 5 Pack
9000A510STYLUS
Protective Film, Touchscreen, 10 Pack, VX6
VX6A512PROTFILM
Voice Recognition Accessories
Headset coiled adapter cable, with quick disconnect connector to a 2.5
mm audio jack. A headset (see below) is required
9000076CABLE
Single Ear Headset with Noise Cancelling Microphone
9000601HEADSET
Scanners
Scanner, LS3408 Fuzzy Logic SR, D9 Interface Cable, 8ft
8510326SCANNER
Scanner, LS3408 Extended Range, D9 Interface Cable, 8ft
8520326SCANNER
Imager, DS3408 Standard Focus, D9 Interface Cable, 9ft
8550326SCANNER
Imager, DS3408 Direct Park Marking, D9 Interface Cable, 9ft
8570326SCANNER
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Manuals and Accessories
27
Bluetooth Scanner and Accessories
LXE Bluetooth module with laser ring scanner, battery, two
hand/wrist straps (large and small)
8651100RINGSCR
LXE Bluetooth module with 1D/2D imager ring scanner,
battery, two hand/wrist straps (large and small)
8652100RINGSCR
Li-Ion Spare Battery for LXE Bluetooth Ring Scanner Module
8650376BATTERY
LXE 8-bay battery charger with US power cord
8650377CHARGER
LXE 8-bay battery charger WW
8650378CHARGER
LXE single-bay charger with US wall plug
8650379CHARGER
LXE single-bay charger WW
8650380CHARGER
PowerScan 7000BT Scanner RS-232 with pointer
8700A301SCNRBTSRI
PowerScan 7000BT Base Station, RS232, without universal power
supply.
8700A501BASERS232
PowerScan 7000BT Base Station Power Supply, Std US, 120V
8700A502PSACUS
PowerScan 7000BT, RS232 Cable for Base Station, DB9S, Coil, 8’
8700A001CBL8DA9F
PowerScan 7000BT Battery Charger with Power Supply, Four Station,
US Std
8700A503CHGR4US
PowerScan 7000BT Battery Pack
8700A504BATT
Bluetooth Standard Range Fuzzy Logic laser scanner
8810A326SCNRBTFZ
Bluetooth Auto range “LORAX” scanner
8820A327SCNRBTER
Desk Cradle, Radio/Charging, Multi-Interface
8800001CRADLE
Desk Cradle, Charge Only, Mulit-Interface
8800002CRADLE
Forklift Cradle, Radio/Charging, Multi-Interface
8800003CRADLE
Forklift Cradle, Charge Only, Multi-Interface
8800004CHARGER
US AC Power Cord
8800051CABLE
Universal Desktop Power Supply 90-264VAC
8800A301ACPS
9-60VDC Forklift Power Supply
8800A302DCPS
Power Cable (connects Power Supply to Forklift)
8800052CABLE
Cable Assembly, DA9F, 9 ft, Cradle to Terminal
8500A051CBL9DA9F
Forklift Rugged Scanner Holder with RAM mount
8800A005STAND
8800 Spare Battery
8800A376BATTERY
Single slot Universal Battery Charger Adapter Cup
8800377CHARGER
Single Slot Battery Charger w/International Power
8800378CHARGER
Universal Battery Charger, 4 slot. Requires 4 adapter cups
8800A379CHGRBASE
Scanner Holster for Belt
8200A501HOLSRBELT
Mounted take up Reel
8000A501INDREEL
Auto Sense Intellistand, Hands Free Scanning
8500A505STANDSMT
Strap with Scanner Clip
9000A411SCNRSTRAP
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
28
VX6 Reference Guide
Manuals and Accessories
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout
Identifying Your VX6
Some features discussed in this document may not be available for all VX6’s. Additionally, some
features require a certain revision level of system software.
Any feature that is not identified as platform specific or requiring a certain level of system
software is available to all VX6’s.
Hardware Platforms
To determine the platform level of your VX6, please refer to the VX6 serial
number decal.
P
Platform 1 VX6
VX6’s identified as Platform 1 by a P1 notation on the serial number decal (and VX6’s with no
platform identification on the serial number decal) are referred to as Platform 1 VX6’s. These
VX6’s DO NOT support the features identified as “Platform 2” throughout this manual.
Note:
If software revision 1ED or greater is installed, “LXE VX6 Platform 1” is displayed
during boot up. See “Software Revisions”, below, to determine the software revision
installed on the VX6. If no software revision is displayed during bootup, the VX6 is a
Platform 1 type as all Platform 2 VX6’s ship with software revision 1ED or greater.
Platform 2 VX6
VX6’s identified as Platform 2 by a P2 notation on the serial number decal support all features,
including those noted as Platform 2 specific.
Note:
If software revision 1ED or greater is installed, “LXE VX6 Platform 2” is displayed
during boot up. See “Software Revisions”, below, to determine the software revision
installed on the VX6.
Software Revisions
S
Some features described in this manual require a certain minimum revision level of
system software. These features are available on all VX6’s if the proper revision
level (or newer) of system software is installed.
The software revision is displayed during boot up and on the default desktop wallpaper. The
revision can also be viewed using the Start | Settings | Control Panel | About icon. For more
information, please refer to Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
To upgrade the VX6 with a newer revision of system software, please refer to “Reflash the VX6”
in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
30
Hardware Configuration
Hardware Configuration
System Hardware
The VX6 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure.
Compact
Flash
Hard
Drive
Any Type
I, II or III
PCMCIA
Card
Antenna
Connector
CF
Slot
Slot A
&
Slot B
Secure Digital
Memory Card
SD
Slot
VX6
Audio
Keyboard/
Connector
Mouse
Connector
(Not Used)
Serial
USB/
Connector
Ethernet
COM3 - PRINTER/PC
Connector
(9pin male "D")
DC out (12V)
Serial
Connector
COM1 - Scanner
(9 pin male "D")
AC Adapter
AC in (120 - 240V)
Uninterruptible
Power
Supply (UPS)
DC in (12-80V)
DC in (12-80V)
Figure 2-1 VX6 Hardware Configuration
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Hardware Configuration
31
Central Processing Unit
The LXE VX6 contains a 400MHz Intel PXA255 CPU.
I/O Components
The VX6 supports the following I/O components:
•
Two 9-pin RS-232 serial ports configured as:
o
o
Note:
COM1
COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”)
There is no COM2 port on the VX6.
•
Two PCMCIA slots (supporting Type I or II PCMCIA cards).
•
One slot for SD memory card.
•
Compact flash drive.
•
Integrated QWERTY keyboard.
•
Ports available via dongle cable:
•
o
USB Host port
o
USB Client port
o
Ethernet port
One audio jack providing monaural audio output.
System Memory
Main system memory is 128MB DRAM.
Note:
The 64MB SDRAM option has been discontinued.
Video Subsystem
The LXE VX6 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display. The video subsystem complies
with the VESA VL bus standard. The resolution of this display is 800 by 320 pixels. This
resolution complies with the SVGA graphics industry standard.
The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion.
Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” later in this chapter and “Screen
Blanking” in Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
32
Hardware Configuration
Power Supply
Vehicle power input for the VX6 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to
perform any manual operation within the VX6.
If 12V to 60V DC power is not available – for example, in an office environment – an optional
external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate
DC level. See “External Power Supply”, later in this chapter.
Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible.
Uninterruptible Power Supply
A DC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) battery is available to maintain power to the VX6 for a
minimum of 15 minutes when vehicle power is not available (such as when a vehicle battery is
being swapped).
Backup Battery
The LXE VX6 has a permanent lithium battery installed to maintain time and date. The backup
battery is not user serviceable and should last five years with normal use before it requires
replacement.
Note:
This battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel.
PCMCIA Slots
Microsoft Windows CE Plug and Play operating system controls the PCMCIA cards. These cards
are hot swappable per the PCMCIA specifications.
CF Slot
The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable. The VX6 must be powered down to insert or remove an
ATA card. Since the operating system is stored on the ATA card, the VX6 cannot operate
without the ATA card.
SD Slot
The SD slot accepts an SD memory card. These cards are hot swappable.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Hardware Configuration
33
Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing
The VX6 contains Bluetooth version 2.0 with Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) up to 3.0 Mbit/s over
the air. Bluetooth device connection (or pairing) can occur at distances up to 32.8 ft (10 meters)
Line of Sight. The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active.
The user will not be able to select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the HX3.
However, the HX3 supports authentication requests from pairing devices. If a pairing device
requests authentication or encryption, the VX6 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode.
Maximum encryption is 128 bit. Encryption is based on the length of the user’s passcode.
Bluetooth will simultaneously support one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner,
either as a slave or as a master Bluetooth device.
See Chapter 3 System Configuration, control panel section titled Bluetooth.
Notes
• The VX6 does not have a Bluetooth managed LED.
• The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation.
• Barcode data captured by the Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the VX6
Scanner Properties control panel applet.
• Multiple beeps may be heard during a barcode scan using the Bluetooth scanner; beeps
from the Bluetooth scanner as the barcode data is accepted/rejected, and other beeps from
the VX6 during final barcode data manipulation.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
34
Power Modes
Power Modes
The VX6 has several distinct power modes.
•
On Mode – When the VX6 is attached to either vehicle 12-80 VDC or an external
power supply and the power button is pressed, the VX6 is in the On mode. In this
mode, the keypad, touchscreen and any attached peripherals such as a scanner
function normally. The display remains on until the backlight timer (if enabled)
expires.
•
User Idle Mode – If the Display Backlight Timer is enabled (see the Display section
in the Windows CE Control panel), the VX6 enters User Idle Mode when the display
backlight timer expires without any Primary Event (see below) to reset the timer.
When the timer expires, the display, display backlight and keyboard backlight are
turned off. The VX6 exits User Idle Mode with any Primary Event. The keypress or
screen touch that exits User Idle Mode is sent to the operating system. The VX6
then transitions to On Mode.
Primary Events
Any key on the keypad
COM1 activity
Stylus touch on the touchscreen Scanner activity
Power button tap
USB client connection
Bluetooth device reconnect / disconnect message
VX6 Reference Guide
•
System Idle Mode – The VX6 does not support System Idle mode.
•
Suspend Mode – TheVX6 does not support Suspend mode. However, if the
Suspend timer is enabled, the VX6 transitions to Off mode when the Suspend timer
expires.
•
Off Mode – The VX6 turns off if the user presses the power button when the VX6 is
On. The VX6 is also off when it is not connected to a power source. However, an
internal Real Time Clock (RTC) powered by an internal battery maintains the date
and time while the VX6 is off.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Physical Controls
35
Physical Controls
On/Off Switch
The power (on/off) switch is a push button switch located on the front control panel of the VX6.
The switch is a momentary switch. If the VX6 is Off, pressing the power switch turns the VX6
On.
For Platform 2 VX6’s, the keyboard LEDs turn on for about one second when the operating
system loads the keyboard driver. If the LEDs blink more than once, this indicates a keyboard
problem.
•
On an external USB keyboard, the NumLock, CapsLock and Scroll Lock keys blink
the same as a desktop PC.
•
On the 60-key keyboard, only the CAPs led is lit during this process.
To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in
this chapter.
P
If the VX6 is On, pressing and releasing the power switch turns the VX6 Off. An orderly
shutdown is preformed. Any open programs are closed, the Windows CE operating system shuts
down and then the VX6 powers off.
If a software lockup should occur and the VX6 is unresponsive to keyboard or touchscreen input,
pressing and holding the power button for several seconds forces a shutdown. However, the
forced shutdown is not an orderly shutdown. All unsaved data and any registry settings not saved
to persistent storage are lost.
The Status LED, located on the keyboard of the VX6, is lit when the power is on:
Note:
•
Green – VX6 is operating from vehicle power or AC power.
•
Solid Yellow – VX6 is operating from the UPS, UPS battery is good.
•
Flashing Yellow – VX6 is operating from the UPS, UPS battery is critically low.
Always turn the computer off prior to removing power cables.
VX6
Figure 2-2 The Power (On/Off) Switch
Caution
!
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The VX6 has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input
power before working on the VX6 (changing fuse, opening access panel,
etc).
VX6 Reference Guide
36
External Connectors
External Connectors
Most external connectors for the VX6 are located on the bottom of the unit.
•
The Keyboard/Mouse connector is not used on the VX6 as the VX6 contains an
integrated keypad.
•
COM1 connects to a serial barcode scanner.
•
COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”) connects to a serial printer or PC with the appropriate
cables.
•
The USB/Ethernet connector accepts dongle cables, offering a combination of the
following ports:
•
o
An Ethernet port
o
A USB Host port
o
A USB Client port.
Audio connects to a mono or stereo telephone headset/microphone.
Other external connectors are located as follows:
•
VX6 Reference Guide
Antenna connectors are located on the top of the VX6. VX6’s can be configured for
a single antenna or dual antennas.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
37
Scanner Serial Connector (COM1)
The serial connector, labeled “SCANNER”, (configured as COM1) is industry-standard RS-232.
The connector includes a PC/AT standard 9–pin “D” male connector. By default, Pin 9 is
configured to supply +5 VDC at 0.4A (max) for an external bar code scanner. Pin 9 may also be
configured to provide RI. Refer to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for
more information on configuring Pin 9.
If Pin 9 is powered off, please see “Technical Specifications – Connection Cable” in the following
section for information on using a serial cable.
If COM1 is not being used for a scanner, it can also be used for screen blanking when the vehicle
is in motion. Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in the following
section for more details.
1
5
6
9
Figure 2-3 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1)
Note:
Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the COM1 serial port.
Pinout
Pin
Signal
Description
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect – Input
2
RXD
Receive Data – Input
3
TXD
Transmit Data – Output
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready – Output
5
GND
Signal/Power Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready – Input
7
RTS
Request to Send – Output
8
CTS
Clear to Send – Input
9
+5VDC
or
RI
Barcode Scanner Power – 400mA max (Default)
or
Ring Indicator – Input
Shell
CGND
Chassis Ground
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
38
External Connectors
Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3)
The serial connector (labeled “COM2/3”) is an industry-standard RS-232 9-pin “D” connector.
The connector and its pin assignments are shown below. By default, Pin 9 provides RI. Pin 9
may also be configured to supply +5 VDC at 0.4A (max) for an external bar code scanner. Refer
to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for more information on configuring Pin
9.
1
5
6
9
Figure 2-4 Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3)
Note:
Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the COM3 serial port.
Pinout
Pin
Signal
Description
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect – Input
2
RXD
Receive Data – Input
3
TXD
Transmit Data – Output
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready – Output
5
GND
Signal/Power Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready – Input
7
RTS
Request to Send – Output
8
CTS
Clear to Send – Input
9
RI
or
+5VDC
Ring Indicator – Input (default)
or
Bar Code Scanner Power – 400mA max
Shell
CGND
Chassis Ground
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
39
Technical Specifications – Connection Cable
The exact serial cable is crucial. Many commercial null modem cables will not work. LXE
recommends the following cable:
Serial cable:
9000A054CBL6D9D9
5
9
1
6
Pinout:
DB9 female
DB9 female
1
7
2
3
3
2
4
6, 8
5
5
6, 8
4
7
1
9
no connection
Figure 2-5 Pinout – Serial Cable
Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port – the laptop
connection will not work.
RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port
RTS
Ready to Send
CTS
Clear to Send
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DSR
Data Set Ready
Remote Side
The device sending data to and receiving data from the VX6
through the LXE serial cable connected to the RS-232 ports on
both devices.
LXE Serial Cable
9000A054CBLD9D9
The VX6 serial port supports four types of handshaking via the LXE serial cable: None, standard
Xon/Xoff, standard DTR/DSR, and a form of RTS/CTS.
To use RTS/CTS, the remote side computer must clear the DTR line which sets the VX6 CTS line
and allows the VX6 to send data to the remote side.
This allows signals and data to travel smoothly between both devices.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
40
External Connectors
Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable
The customer must supply their own cable. The cable must be designed so that pin 7 (RTS –
Request to Send Output) and pin 8 (Clear to Send Input) of a D9 female connector provide
continuity only when the vehicle is stopped (for example, via a switch on the accelerator pedal of
the fork truck). All other pins on the connector must be left unconnected. If pins 7 and 8 do not
provide continuity (or the cable is removed), the VX6 screen remains blank.
Serial cable:
Customer built cable with the following specifications:
5
8
1
7
Pinout:
DB9 female
Function
1
Not Used
2
Not Used
3
Not Used
4
Not Used
5
Not Used
6
Not Used
7
No signal when in motion,
Continuity to Pin 8 when stopped
8
No signal when in motion,
Continuity to Pin 7 when stopped
9
Not Used
Figure 2-6 Pinout – Screen Blanking Cable
Pin 8
Pin 7
Figure 2-7 Sample Cable for Screen Blanking
Please refer to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, for the proper COM port settings to support screen blanking.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
41
Ethernet/USB Connector
The VX6 Ethernet/USB connector accepts dongle cables that provide combinations of the
following connections:
Note:
•
an Ethernet port, via an RJ45 connector
•
a USB Host port for connecting a USB device to the VX6
•
a USB Client port to connect the VX6 to a USB host or hub.
Please refer to the diagrams later in this chapter for details on available ports with the
dongle cable options.
The connector is shown below.
1
5
6
10
11
15
Figure 2-8 VX6 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector
Note:
Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet/USB connector.
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
USB2N_A
2
–
Not Connected
3
–
Not Connected
4
RXP
Receive +
5
RXN
Receive –
6
USB2P_A
USB D +
7
DGND
8
–
9
RJ45_45
RJ45, Pins 4 and 5 Connections
10
RJ45_78
RJ45, Pins 7 and 8 Connections
11
5V_USB_23
12
–
Not Connected
13
–
Not Connected
14
TXN
Transmit –
15
TXP
Transmit +
Shell
CGND
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Description
USB D –
USB Power Return
Not Connected
USB Power, Current Limited
Chassis Ground
VX6 Reference Guide
42
External Connectors
Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables
The available dongle cables are shown below.
1
2
1
D15 Connector
2
RJ45 Connector
3
USB Host
Connector
4
USB Client
Connector
1
D15 Connector
2
RJ45 Connector
3
USB Host
Connector
3
4
9000075CABLE
1
2
3
9000052CABLE
Figure 2-9 VX6 Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables
Note:
Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet/USB connector.
The connectors and pinouts for the dongle cables are detailed below.
!
VX6 Reference Guide
9000075CABLE is required when using ActiveSync via USB on the VX6.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
43
D15 Female Connector
1
6
11
5
10
15
Figure 2-10 D15 Female Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
Description
1
USB2N_A
USB-H D –
2
–
3
Not Connected
USB-D Power
4
RXP
Receive +
5
RXN
Receive –
6
USB2P_A
7
DGND
8
USB-H D +
USB-H Power Return
USB-D D –
9
RJ45_45
RJ45, Pins 4 and 5 Connections
10
RJ45_78
RJ45, Pins 7 and 8 Connections
11
5V_USB_23
USB-H Power, Current Limited
12
USB-D Power Return
13
USB-D D +
14
TXN
Transmit –
15
TXP
Transmit +
Shell
CGND
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chassis Ground
VX6 Reference Guide
44
External Connectors
USB Host Connector
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-11 Dongle Cable USB Host Port
Pinout
Pin
Signal
Description
1
5V_USB_23
2
USB2N_A
USB D –
3
USB2P_A
USB D +
4
DGND
USB Power Return
Shell
CGND
Chassis Ground
USB Power, Current Limited
USB Client Connector
2
3
1
4
Figure 2-12 Dongle Cable USB Client Port
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
5V_USB_23
2
USB2N_A
USB D –
3
USB2P_A
USB D +
4
DGND
VX6 Reference Guide
Description
USB Power, Current Limited
USB Power Return
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
45
RJ45 Connector
1
8
Figure 2-13 Dongle Cable Ethernet Port
Pinout
Pin
Signal
Description
1
TXP
Transmit +
2
TXN
Transmit –
3
RXP
Receive +
4
–
Not Connected
5
–
Not Connected
6
RXN
7
–
Not Connected
8
–
Not Connected
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Receive –
VX6 Reference Guide
46
External Connectors
Audio Connector
The VX6 audio connector accepts a headset with a 2.5mm plug, such as a mono telephone headset
with microphone or a stereo headset.
Please refer to “Mixer” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration” for information on configuring the
audio port for either a mono headset with microphone or a stereo headset.
Figure 2-14 VX6 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones
Note:
The VX6 is not configured for standard PC speakers.
Pinout
Pin
Description
1
Microphone
2
Speaker
3
Ground
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
47
Power Supply Connector
Power is supplied to the VX6 through the power connector. Additionally this assembly provides a
connection point for the vehicle’s chassis ground to be connected internally to the conductive
chassis of the computer.
The VX6 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 12 to 80 Volts.
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 2-15 The Power Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
DC Positive (+)
2
UPS Battery Positive (+)
3
Chassis Ground
4
UPS Battery Negative (–)
5
DC Negative (–)
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
48
External Connectors
UPS Battery Pack Connectors
Input
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 2-16 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
DC Positive (+)
2
Not used
3
Chassis Ground
4
Not used
5
DC Negative (–)
Output
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 2-17 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
DC Positive (+)
2
UPS Battery Positive (+)
3
Chassis Ground
4
UPS Battery Negative (–)
5
DC Negative (–)
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
49
UPS Battery Extension Cable Connectors
Input
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 2-18 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
DC Positive (+)
2
UPS Battery Positive (+)
3
Chassis Ground
4
UPS Battery Negative (–)
5
DC Negative (–)
Output
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 2-19 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector
Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
DC Positive (+)
2
UPS Battery Positive (+)
3
Chassis Ground
4
UPS Battery Negative (–)
5
DC Negative (–)
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
50
External Connectors
Antenna Connections
Note:
VX6’s are equipped with a radio and require an either an external or an internal
antenna. Some VX6’s may be equipped with a dual antenna option. For these VX6’s, an
external antenna must be connected to each antenna connector.
1. Antenna
2. Antenna Connector
1
2
Figure 2-20 External Antenna
Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin
VX6’s ordered with an external antenna option have either one or two antenna connectors located
on top of the unit. VX6’s ordered with the internal antenna option do not have an external
antenna connector.
Figure 2-21 RF Antenna SS Connector
Vehicle Remote Antenna Mount
The external antenna (or antennas) can be remotely mounted on the vehicle. Please refer to the
“Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna Installation Sheet” for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
External Connectors
51
Internal Antenna
If the internal antenna option is ordered, an antenna is mounted on the inside of the user access
panel cover.
Figure 2-22 Internal Antenna Cables
The internal antenna assembly has two antenna cables which are attached to the radio card.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
52
The QWERTY Keyboard
The QWERTY Keyboard
The VX6 has a QWERTY keyboard, available with a standard overlay, an IBM 3270 overlay or
an IBM 5250 overlay. These keyboards have 101 keyboard functions, including a numeric
keypad. Please refer to Appendix A, “Key Maps”, for keypress combinations.
ESC
CTRL
SHIFT
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
@
!
|
E
;
\
A
ALT
$
#
W
%
T
F
G
F6
&
^
R
:
Z
C
X
V
O
.
N
P
PgUp
?
K
_
B
F9
)
I
J
~
SP
(
*
,
H
F8
F7
U
Y
‘
D
S
BKLT
F5
F4
L
Home
PgDn
CAPS
/
2nd
=
F10
INS
BKSP
ENTER
[
<
END
M
7
{
4
]
1
0
8
5
2
+
}
>
9
6
3
DEL
.
Figure 2-23 QWERTY Keyboard Standard
IBM 3270 Overlay
PA1
ESC
2ND
PA3
PA2
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F5
F4
F6
@
!
Attn
SHIFT
|
$
#
W
E
;
\
%
R
^
T
&
:
‘
D
S
,
G
F
O
P
Z
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
INS
BKSP
{
4
5
}
6
K
L
ENTER
[
]
1
2
>
3
NL
C
X
PgUp
?
J
H
_
~
SP
)
I
.
Clr
ALT
/
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
CAPS
F10
Del
SysReq
A
F9
Ins
Rst
CTRL
F8
F7
V
B
N
Home
PgDn
<
END
M
0
DEL
.
Figure 2-24 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 3270 Overlay
IBM 5252 Overlay
ESC
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F5
F4
F6
Dup
CTRL
@
!
Attn
SHIFT
|
E
;
S
%
R
^
T
&
:
D
‘
F
G
H
SP
.
J
X
C
V
B
N
/
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
P
INS
BKSP
Field Exit
PgUp
L
ENTER
[
{
4
]
1
5
2
}
>
6
3
Fld-
_
~
Z
)
O
?
K
NL
Clr
ALT
I
Fld+
,
CAPS
F10
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
F9
Ins
Del
SysReq
\
A
$
#
W
F8
F7
Home
M
PgDn
END
<
0
DEL
.
Figure 2-25 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 5250 Overlay
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
Press the <CTRL> + <Enter> keys to initiate the IBM 5250 Field Exit Function.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The QWERTY Keyboard
53
Key Maps
The keyboard supports all 101 keyboard functions. However, because the keyboard only has 60
keys, all functions are not visible (or printed on the keyboard). Therefore the VX6 keyboard
supports what is called hidden keys -- keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard.
The hidden keys supported by the VX6 are listed in Appendix A, “Key Maps”.
Custom Key Maps
A key or combination of keys can be remapped to provide a single keypress, a string of
keypresses or to execute an application or command.
All key remapping is done using the KeyPad option in the Control Panel. Please see KeyPad in
Chapter 3, System Configuration, for details.
NumLock and the VX6
The keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator or key. NumLock is always On.
Keyboard Backlight
The LXE keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight and the display share the same
timer, which is configured in the Windows CE Control Panel. When the display is On, the
keyboard backlight is also On. Please refer to “Power Management” later in this document for
information on configuring the timeout.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
54
The QWERTY Keyboard
Keyboard LEDs
The VX6 keyboard has two (2) LED indicators.
KLT
CAPS
F10
INS
BKSP
2nd
ENTER
/
=
[
<
END
7
4
1
1. CapsLock Mode LED
Indicator
2. Secondary Mode LED
Indicator
0
Figure 2-26 Keyboard LEDs
CAPS LED
This LED indicates the state of the keyboard CapsLock mode. If CapsLock is enabled this LED is
illuminated green. When CapsLock is off, the LED is dark.
D
CAPS
F1
B
Figure 2-27 The CapsLock Key
Press <2nd> then <F1> to toggle CapsLock On and Off.
The default value of CapsLock is “Off”.
For information on preserving CapsLock configuration after a reboot, please see “Configuring
CapsLock Behavior” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The QWERTY Keyboard
55
Secondary Keys LED
The VX6 keyboard is equipped with several secondary keys. These keys are identified by the
superscripted text found on the keyboard keys. The secondary keys are accessible by using two
(2) keystrokes: the <2nd> key followed by the superscripted key.
C
2ND
C
Figure 2-28 The Secondary Key
Once the <2nd> state is enabled (by pressing the <2nd> key) the Secondary Mode LED is
illuminated and the <2nd> state is enabled until another key is pressed. The <2nd> key is toggled on
with a <2nd> keypress and then immediately off with another <2nd> keypress.
For example:
Press <2nd> and <F1> to turn CapsLock on and off.
Press <2nd> and <↑> to initiate the PgUp command.
Press <2nd> and <Q> to type the “!” key.
Press <2nd> and <BkSp> to enter the Insert (Ins) mode.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
56
The QWERTY Keyboard
Control Keys
The VX6 keyboard has several control keys, some of which are not used on the VX6.
Note:
The 2nd functions of the <F4> and <F5>keys are not used as the display brightness is
adjusted via the buttons on the control panel.
The 2nd functions of the <F6>, and <F7> keys are not used as the VX6 has TFT LCD
screen with no provision for contrast adjustments.
The 2nd functions of the <F8> and <F9> keys are not used as the sound volume on the
VX6 is controlled with the Volume and Sounds icon in the Microsoft Windows CE
Control Panel.
The 2nd function of the <F10> key is not used as the display backlight timer also controls
the keyboard backlight.
1. Display Brightness
Control Keys (Not
used)
BKLT
R/S
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
2. Display Contrast
Control Keys (Not
used)
3. Speaker Volume
Control Keys (Not
used)
4. Backlight Control
Key (See above)
Figure 2-29 The VMT Keyboard Display Controls
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The QWERTY Keyboard
57
General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts
Use the keyboard shortcuts in the chart below to navigate with the VX6 keyboard. These are
standard keyboard shortcuts for Windows CE applications.
Press these keys …
To …
CTRL + C
Copy
CTRL + X
Cut
CTRL + V
Paste
CTRL + Z
Undo
DELETE
Delete
SHIFT with any of the arrow keys
Select more than one item in a window or on the
desktop, or select text within a document.
CTRL+A
Select all.
ALT+ESC
Cycle through items in the order they were opened.
CTRL+ESC
Display the Start menu.
ALT+Underlined letter in a menu
name
Display the corresponding menu.
Underlined letter in a command
name on an open menu
Carry out the corresponding command.
ESC
Cancel the current task.
The touchscreen provides equivalent functionality to a mouse:
•
A touch on the touchscreen is equivalent to a left mouse click.
•
Many items can be moved by the “drag and drop” method, touching the desired item,
moving the stylus across the screen and releasing the stylus in the desired location.
•
A double stylus tap is equivalent to a double click.
•
A touch and hold is equivalent to a right mouse click.
Note:
Some applications may not support this right click method. Please review
documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click
configuration.
USB Keyboard/Mouse
A standard USB mouse can be attached to the VX6 using the appropriate dongle cable. A standard
USB keyboard can be attached to Platform 2 VX6’s using the appropriate dongle cable. The
dongle cable attaches to the VX6 and provides a USB connector. Please refer to documentation
provided with the USB keyboard and mouse for more information on their operation.
P
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in
this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
58
The QWERTY Keyboard
Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)
The Input Panel may be enabled via the Input Panel icon in the Control panel. The Input Panel
can be displayed as a large or small keyboard.
Figure 2-30 Small and Large Virtual Keyboards
Virtual keyboards display the actual character a keypress results in. For example, pressing the
<Shift> key on the virtual keyboard toggles the characters displayed on the keys between upper
and lower case. The <áü> key toggles the keys between standard and international symbols. The
<Shift> and <áü> keys can be used in combination for capitalized international characters.
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
When the virtual keyboard is displayed, the physical keyboard is still active. Therefore it
is possible to input data from both keyboards.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The QWERTY Keyboard
59
Enabling the Input Panel
The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the Input Panel, select Start | Settings |
Control Panel | Input Panel icon. Make sure the “Allow applications to change the input panel
state” checkbox is checked and warmboot the VX6.
Figure 2-31 Input Panel Properties
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
60
The Display
The Display
The VX6 Display is a thin-film transistor display capable of supporting half screen SVGA+
graphics modes. Display size is 800 x 320 pixels. The display covering is designed to resist stains.
The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input.
The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion.
Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” earlier in this chapter and “Screen
Blanking” in Chapter 3, System Configuration” for details.
Cleaning the Display
Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the display. If the glass becomes soiled or
smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex® without vinegar or use
Isopropyl Alcohol. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they
may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not scrub optical
surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint/particulates can be removed
with clean, filtered canned air.
Touchscreen
The touchscreen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a
stylus, and translate them into computer commands. In effect, it simulates a computer mouse.
Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used. A right mouse click is simulated by touching and
holding the screen for the appropriate time interval.
Note:
Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use
an actual pen, pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen.
An extra or replacement stylus may be ordered from LXE. See the “Accessories” section for the
stylus part number.
Please refer to Chapter 3, “System Configuration” for more information on:
•
Calibrating the touchscreen
•
Disabling the touchscreen.
LXE offers a replaceable touchscreen protective film to protect the touchscreen when the VX6 is
used in an abrasive environment. For information on installing or removing the protective film,
please refer to the “VX6 User’s Guide”.
Touchscreen Heater
Extended temperature versions of the VX6 contain a touchscreen heater. The touchscreen heater
can be disabled on Platform 2 VX6’s when not needed. Please see “MX3-VXC Options” in
Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
P
VX6 Reference Guide
To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in
this chapter.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
61
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
The VX6 has two PCMCIA slots, one Compact Flash slot and one Secure Digital slot. The
PCMCIA slots are stacked on top of each other and located on the right hand side of the opening.
The PCMCIA slots support the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
(PCMCIA) 2.1 standards. The upper slot is designated as Slot A and the lower slot is designated
as Slot B.
Slot A accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards. If a radio card is used, it must be installed in Slot A to
prevent damage to the internal radio cables. LXE supports only Type II radios.
Slot B accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards.
The PCMCIA slots may be disabled by the user. To enable or disable a PCMCIA slot, select
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA icon.
The center slot is a Compact Flash slot, containing the CF ATA hard drive. This drive contains
the operating system and settings.
The left slot is used for Secure Digital (SD) memory cards.
SD
CF ATA
PCMCIA A
PCMCIA B
4
1. SD Card Slot
2. Compact Flash Hard
Drive
1
2
3
3. PCMCIA Slots
Figure 2-32 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots
PCMCIA Slots
Slot A and B PCMCIA Card Management is handled by the Microsoft Windows CE operating
system. The PCMCIA cards are Plug and Play devices and can be “hot swapped”. For more
details, refer to the Windows CE help screens or refer to the documentation delivered with the
PCMCIA card.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Although cards in the PCMCIA slot may be hot swapped, the VX6 is not environmentally
sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap PCMCIA cards.
VX6 Reference Guide
62
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
PCMCIA Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
VX6 Reference Guide
Signal
GND
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
-CE1
A10
-OE
A11
A9
A8
A13
A14
-WE
RDY/-IREQ
SLOT_VCC
SLOT-VPP
A16
A15
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
WP/A_-IOIS16
GND
Pin
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Signal
12V_RF_POWER
-CDI
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
-CE2
n.c. or VS1#
-IORD
-IOWR
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
SLOT_VCC
SLOT_VPP
A22
A23
A24
A25
n.c. or VS2#
RESET
-WAIT
-INPACK
-REG
BVD2/-SPKR
BDV1/-STSCHG
D8
D9
D10
-CD2
GND
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
63
Install PCMCIA Cards
Equipment Needed: Phillips No. 1 screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 9±1
inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m).
Note:
The example below details installing a wireless radio card.
PCMCIA cards is similar, except there is no antenna.
Installation of other
The radio card is installed in slot A (the upper slot). When a second PCMCIA card is present,
such as a Bluetooth CF card via a PCMCIA adapter, the second card is installed in Slot B (the
lower slot).
Install the Type II PCMCIA Radio
The LXE Model VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer is specifically for use with LXE
Model 6726, 6816, 4830 and 4831 Type II PCMCIA radios. Substitution of
other PCMCIA radios will void the FCC, Industry Canada and other
international radio certifications for the Model VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer
and is strictly prohibited.
Caution
!
1.
Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable.
2.
Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can
be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed.
Partially insert the Type II PCMCIA Radio into Slot A (the upper right slot).
Caution
Slot A MUST BE used for the radio card. Installing a radio card in Slot B can
result in pinching or other damage to the internal antenna cable.
!
SD
CF ATA
PCMCIA A
PCMCIA B
Radio Card
Figure 2-33 Inserting the Type II PCMCIA Radio
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above.
VX6 Reference Guide
64
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
3.
Before completely inserting the radio, connect the Antenna Cable(s) to the radio, using the
port(s) indicated below.
Note:
Radio cards for single antenna units may have the unused antenna port covered
with tape.
The internal antenna is a dual (diversity) antenna.
Summit CF 802.11a/b/g Radio Card
The Summit 802.11a/b/g radio has four antenna ports, two ports are for the “a” portion
(5.0GHz) of the radio and two ports are for the “b/g” portion (2.4 GHz) of the radio.
CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter. Hold the radio card with the antenna ports
facing down. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows:
•
•
•
Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Main a port or the Main b/g port
depending on antenna type. Auxiliary port is not used.
Dual a antennas – Connect antenna cables to both Main a and Auxiliary a ports.
Dual antennas, one a antenna and one b/g antenna – Connect the a antenna cable
to the Main a port and connect the b/g antenna cable to the Main b/g port.
Auxiliary
a Port
Main
b/g Port
Auxiliary
b/g Port
Main
a Port
Figure 2-34 Summit 802.11 a/b/g Antenna Cable Connections
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
65
Summit CF Radio Card
The Summit 802.11b/g radio has two antenna ports.
The Summit CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter. Hold the radio card with the
antenna ports facing down. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows:
•
•
Summit radio with single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Main port.
Auxiliary port is not used.
Summit radio with dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both Main and
Auxiliary ports.
Main
Port
Auxiliary
Port
Figure 2-35 Summit 802.11b/g Antenna Cable Connections
Cisco Radio Card
Hold the radio card with the Cisco logo label facing up. Connect the antenna cable(s) as
follows:
•
Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to right port, as shown below.
•
Dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both ports.
CISCO SYSTEMS
CISCO AIRONET 350 SERIES
WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER
Left Port
Right Port
Figure 2-36 Cisco Antenna Cable Connections
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
66
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
Symbol 11Mb Radio Card
Hold the radio card with the Symbol logo label facing up. Connect the antenna cable(s) as
follows:
•
Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Port A (left port), as shown below.
•
Dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both ports.
Spectrum24®
High Rate 11 Mbps
Wireless LAN Adapter
IEEE 802.11b
Port A
Port B
Figure 2-37 Symbol 11Mb Antenna Cable Connections
4.
Now complete the insertion of the Type II PCMCIA Radio into the slot.
Note:
When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque
wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws
must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1
driver head.
5.
Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on.
6.
For VX6’s with a Summit radio, review RX Diversity and TX Diversity on the Global
Settings tab of the Summit Client Utility to ensure these settings correspond to the VX6’s
antenna configuration.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
67
CF Card Slot
This slot contains the Compact Flash (CF) hard drive.
!
The operating system and settings are stored on the CF card. The VX6 cannot
operate without this card. Cards in this slot CANNOT be hot swapped.
Replace a CF Card
1.
Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable.
2.
Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover
can be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed.
3.
Remove the card currently installed present in the CF slot and replace it with the new CF
card. The replacement CF card must contain the operating system in order for the VX6
to operate.
SD
CF ATA
PCMCIA A
PCMCIA B
CF Card
Figure 2-38 Inserting the CF ATA Card
4.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Note:
The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above.
Note:
When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque
wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws
must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1
driver head.
Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on.
VX6 Reference Guide
68
PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots
SD Card Slot
The slot accepts a Secure Digital (SD) memory card. The card in this slot can be hot swapped.
Note:
Although cards in the SD slot may be hot swapped, the VX6 is not environmentally
sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap cards.
Install an SD Card
1.
Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable.
2.
Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover
can be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed.
3.
Insert the card into the ATA SD. This slot accepts an SD memory card only.
SD
CF ATA
PCMCIA A
PCMCIA B
SD Card
Figure 2-39 Inserting the SD ATA Card
4.
VX6 Reference Guide
Note:
The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above.
Note:
When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque
wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws
must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1
driver head.
Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Power Supply
69
Power Supply
AC to DC power input for the VX6 is delivered via an optional external power supply. See
“External Power Supply”.
Vehicle power input for the VX6 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to
perform any manual operation within the VX6. See “Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection”. An
optional uninterruptible power supply (UPS) battery can be used with the vehicle DC power
supply.
Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible on the VX6.
External Power Supply
1
2
1. AC Input Cable
(US only)
2. DC Output Cable
Figure 2-40 Optional Power Supply Cable
In North America, this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with
output rated 12 – 80 VDC, minimum 75 W. Outside North America, this unit is intended
for use with an IEC certified ITE power supply with output rated 12 – 80 VDC, minimum
75 W.
The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V, 60Hz supply or, outside North
America, to a 230V, 50Hz supply, using the appropriate detachable cordset. In all cases, connect
the external AC supply to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp
overcurrent protection (10 Amp for 230V circuits).
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Instructions for using this configuration are contained in “VX6 User’s Guide” section
titled “Installation”.
VX6 Reference Guide
70
Power Supply
Specifications
Feature
Specification
Dimensions
3.40” x 5.87” x 2.00”
Weight
<3.0 pounds
Input Power Switch
None
Power “ON” Indicator
None
Input Fusing
None
Input Voltage
90VAC min - 264VAC max
Input Frequency
47 - 63 Hz
Input Surge Current
50 Amps max @ 264VAC input
Input Connector
Standard IEC input power cord
(included with US units only)
Output Connector
3 pin female connector
Output Voltage
+24VDC
Output Voltage
Tolerance
+/- 8%, measured at the end of the output
power cable
Output Current
0 Amps min, 1.87 Amps max
Safety and Emissions
Compliance
FCC, Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices,
Class B.
EN 55022
UL1950 and IEC 950
Environmental Specifications
The AC to DC adapter will withstand the following environmental characteristics:
VX6 Reference Guide
Feature
Specification
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Humidity
Operates in a relative humidity of:
5 – 95% (non-condensing)
ESD Immunity
Per IEC 801-1
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Power Supply
71
Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection
Note:
Instructions for using this configuration are contained in “VX6 User’s Guide” section
titled “Installation”.
1. To Vehicle Battery
1
+
GND
2. To Vehicle
Mounted Device
or UPS Battery
Pack
2
3
3. White (DC+)
6
4
4. Black (DC-)
5
5. Green (GND)
6. 12 – 80 VDC
Figure 2-41 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable (12 Ft.)
1. Vehicle Electrical
System
2. 10 Amp Slow
Blow Fuse
1
2
3
3. DC +
6
4. DC -
7
4
5. Vehicle Chassis
8
5
6. Red / White
7. Red /Black
8. Green
Figure 2-42 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle
Note:
Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. Connecting the
cable to the VX6 with the polarity reversed will cause the VX6’s fuse to be blown. See the
following table for wire color-coding specifics.
Wiring color codes for LXE supplied DC input power cabling:
Vehicle Supply
Wire Color
+12 - 80VDC
(DC +)
Red with White Stripe
Return
(DC -)
Red with Black Stripe
Vehicle Chassis
(GND)
Green
Figure 2-43 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
72
Power Supply
VX6 Input Power Specifications
Feature
Specification
DC Input Voltage
12 - 80 VDC
Input Current
3.5 Amps
Input Fuse
10A Time Delay
Input Power Switch
SPST 6 Amp 125VDC
Power Adapter Cable
LXE offers an adapter cable (part no. 9000077CABLER) to adapt certain VX1, VX2 or VX4 DC
power supplies to the VX6. Please read and follow all cautions in the “VX6 User’s Guide” to
determine if your present power supply can be used with the VX6.
1. VX6 Connector
2. VX1/2/4 Power
Supply Connector
1
2
Figure 2-44 Power Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 to VX6
Caution:
!
Caution:
!
Caution:
!
VX6 Reference Guide
For use only with VX1/2/4 DC power cables with yellow colored cable containing
18AWG wires.
Do not use this cable with VX1/2/4 DC power cables with gray colored cable
containing 22AWG wires. These power cables must be replaced with a VX5/6/7
power cable.
When a DC power cable that is eight feet or longer is in a 12V application, there
may be an excessive voltage drop over the longer cable. If this occurs, a new
power cable is required.
Do not use this adapter with AC power supplies originally designed for the 1380,
1390, VX1, VX2 or VX4. These power supplies do not have sufficient power for
the VX6.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Power Supply
73
CMOS Battery
The LXE VX6 has a permanent 190 mAh Lithium battery installed to maintain time, date and
CMOS setup information. The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last five years
with normal use before it requires replacement.
Fuse
The VX6 uses a 100V, 10A time delay (slow blow), high current interrupting rating fuse that is
externally accessible and user replaceable. Should it need replacement, replace with same size,
rating and type of fuse – Littlefuse 0234010 or Optifuse MSC-10A (5x20mm).
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICE-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est
confirme là norme NMB-003 du Canada
TENT 5862393
CAUTION: For continues protection against risk of fire,
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromette la preotection
contre les risques d'incendie, remplacer par un fusible
de mmes
ê
types de mmes
ê caractristques
é
nominales.
1. Fuse
AUDIO
INPUT:
12-80VDC
6A 72W
ETHERNET /
USB
2. Twist in this
direction to
remove
T10A, 125V
1
2
3. Twist in this
direction to insert
3
Figure 2-45 Fuse Replacement
Caution:
Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input power
before changing fuse.
!
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
74
VX6 Reference Guide
Power Supply
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 3 System Configuration
Introduction
There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX6. Many of the setup
and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software
installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only, the
configuration of your specific VX6 computer may vary. The following sections provide a general
reference for the configuration of the VX6 and some of its optional features.
Your VX6 operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. The VX6
operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE .NET or Windows CE. This is the
factory default value for the Desktop Display Background.
This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE 5.0 only. Windows CE .NET
4.2 information and procedures are contained in Appendix C, “VX6 CE .NET 4.2”.
Windows CE Operating System
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE
user’s guides or the Windows CE on-line Help application installed with the VX6.
This chapter’s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows
options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers.
Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the
VX6 and its Windows CE environment.
Wireless Network Configuration
All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”.
Warmboot
A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data. However, any applications
installed to RAM are lost, as is all data in RAM. This happens because the operating system is
stored on the flash drive, but must be loaded into RAM to run.
All registry configurations are automatically preserved. Any applications stored as .CAB files in
the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the
Launch utility.
Coldboot
A coldboot reboots the computer, erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory
default settings. In order to be preserved, applications and data must be stored in the System
folder. Registry information is not preserved. Only factory default applications and drivers stored
as .CAB files in the System directory are loaded by Launch.
A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the \Windows directory. This
application automatically cold boots the VX6, erasing any customer applied registry changes and
returning the VX6 to its factory settings.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
76
Installed Software
Installed Software
When you order a VX6 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed
for operation and radio communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories
in the VX6.
This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files. Files
installed in each VX6 are specific to the intended function of the VX6.
Files installed in each VX6 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio
specific drivers – the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the manufacturer (e.g. Summit,
Cisco, Symbol) for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable.
Software Load
The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE 5.0 OS, hardware-specific
OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and
utilities. The software supported is summarized below:
Operating System
• Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system components, including
Windows CE 5.0 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for remote APIs),
device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input, window
management, and common controls.
Network and Device Drivers
Bluetooth (Optional)
Wavelink Avalanche (Optional)
LXE AppLock
Java (Optional)
• Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option (when installed).
Terminal Emulation (Optional)
• RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot
(if installed).
LXE API Routines (see “Accessories” for the LXE SDK Kit part number)
Note:
Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are
released by LXE.
Software Applications
The following applications are included:
VX6 Reference Guide
•
WordPad (was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE)
•
Word Viewer
•
Excel Viewer
•
PDF Viewer
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Installed Software
77
•
Image Viewer
•
Scanner Wedge (LXE developed)
•
ActiveSync
•
Transcriber
•
Media Player
•
Internet Explorer
Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them.
Java (Optional)
Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the
EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of Java examples and Plug-ins is also installed
with the Java option. LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device.
LXE RFTerm (Optional)
Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm.
Please refer to “Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters” earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick
start instruction. Refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD for complete
information and instruction.
AppLock
Installed by LXE. Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start | Settings | Control
Panel | Administration. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator
for the mobile device end-user. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user
mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still
reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is
automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up.
See Also: Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction.
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional)
The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in
conjunction with the Avalanche Molility Center (MC) Console.
After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network
parameter configuration is supported for:
•
IP address: DHCP or static IP
•
RF network SSID
•
DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary)
•
Subnet mask
•
Enabler update
Related Manual: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”.
The VX6 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile
device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE
devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
78
Installed Software
After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin
normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch
application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel
through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager
is LXE_VXC.
LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files
upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE
representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline.
If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler
should not be installed on the mobile device(s).
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Desktop
79
Desktop
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE
user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile
device.
The VX6 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP.
At a minimum, it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My
Computer, Internet Explorer, and the Recycle Bin.
At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to
pop up. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents,
Settings, Help, and Run.
Desktop Icon
Function
My Device
Access files and programs.
Recycle Bin
Storage for files that are to be deleted.
Internet Explorer
Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires radio card and
Internet Service Provider – ISP enrollment is not available
from LXE).
Wireless Configuration Icon
Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration
utility, either the SCU (Summit Client Utility) or ACU
(Cisco Aironet Client Utility).
Bluetooth
Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth
devices.
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications.
Start
Access programs, select from the Favorites listing,
documents last worked on, change/view settings for the
control panel or taskbar, on-line help or run programs.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
80
Desktop
Folders Copies at Startup
The following folders are copied on startup:
System\Desktop => Windows\Desktop
System\Favorites => Windows\Favorites
System\Fonts
=> Windows\Fonts
System\Help
=> Windows\Help
System\Programs => Windows\Programs
This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders.
The following folders are NOT copied on startup:
Windows\AppMgr
Windows\Recent
Windows\Startup
Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect.
Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed
too early in the boot process so it has no effect.
Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are
not parsed by launch.
My Device Folders
Folder
Description
Preserved upon Reboot?
Application Data
Data saved by running applications
No
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications
No
Network
Mounted network drive
No
Program Files
Applications
No
System
Internal SD Flash Card (CAB file storage)
Yes
Temp
Location for temporary files
No
Windows
Operating System in Secure Storage
No
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
81
Start Menu Program Options
The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be
different based on the software and hardware options purchased.
Access:
Start | Programs
Cisco
Set Cisco radio / network parameters
(Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details)
Communication
Stores Network communication options
ActiveSync
Transfer files between a VX6 and a desktop computer
Connect
Run this command after setting up a connection
Start FTP Server
Begin connection to FTP server
Stop FTP Server
End connection to FTP server
Microsoft File Viewers
View downloaded files (see Note)
Excel Viewer
View Excel 97 and newer documents
Image Viewer
View BMP, JPEG and PNG images
PDF Viewer
View Adobe Acrobat documents
Word Viewer
View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files
Summit
Set Summit radio / network parameters
(Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details)
Command Prompt
The command line interface in a separate window
Internet Explorer
Access web pages on the world wide Internet
Java
Option
LXE RFTerm
Option. Terminal emulation application.
Media Player
Music management program
Microsoft WordPad
Opens an ASCII notepad
Remote Desktop Connection
Log on to a Windows Terminal Server
Transcriber
Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen
Avalanche
Option. Remote management for networked devices
Windows Explorer
File management program
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected.
VX6 Reference Guide
82
Start Menu Program Options
Communication
Access:
Start | Programs | Communication
ActiveSync
Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect, ActiveSync will synchronize
using the radio link on the VX6. See also: Chapter 1 “Introduction”, section “ActiveSync – Initial
Setup”.
Requirement:
ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop)
computer. ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website. Follow their
instructions to locate, download and install ActiveSync on your desktop
computer.
For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then
open ActiveSync Help. See also section titled “Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync” for more
ActiveSync information.
Synchronizing from the VX6 using a USB ActiveSync connection:
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device.
1.
To initiate synchronization from your device, connect the USB cable to the PC and to the
dongle cable on the VX6. The VX6 connects automatically.
2.
Click the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC.
3.
Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect.
4.
To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on
the desktop PC.
Synchronizing from the VX6 using Serial or RF connection:
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device.
1.
To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication |
ActiveSync to begin the process.
2.
Click the Connect button.
3.
Tap the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC.
4.
Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect.
5.
To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on
the desktop PC.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
83
Connect
Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host. Several pre-defined connect setups
are included in the factory setup:
•
COM1 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud
•
COM3 2 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud
•
USB direct connect
The default connect setup is USB direct connect.
After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to
connect to a host. After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established, the
ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link.
See Also: “Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection”
Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server
These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server. The server defaults to
Off (for security) unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu.
2
The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
84
Start Menu Program Options
Command Prompt
Access:
Start | Programs | Command Prompt
Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen
Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands.
Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close.
Internet Explorer
Access:
Start | Programs | Internet Explorer
This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in the
Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC
Internet Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Internet Explorer Help.
Media Player
Access:
Start | Programs | Media Player
There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general
desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Click the “?” button to access Media
Player Help.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
85
Remote Desktop Connection
Access:
Start | Programs | Remote Desktop Connection
There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to
the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options.
Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button.
Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and
Experience tabs. Click the “?” button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help.
Note:
VX6 and Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop
Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select Preload or 0409
(depending on system software revision) from the keymap popup. Click OK.
Transcriber
Access:
Start | Programs | Transcriber
Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu. To make changes to the Transcriber
application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., click the “hand with a pen”
icon in the toolbar. Click the “?” button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help.
Windows Explorer
Access:
Start | Programs | Windows Explorer
There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the
general desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Windows Explorer
Help.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
86
Start Menu Program Options
Taskbar
Access:
Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu
Factory Default Settings
Always on Top
Enabled
Auto hide
Disabled
Show Clock
Enabled
There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop
PC Windows Taskbar options.
When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button
appear.
Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties
Advanced Tab
Expand Control Panel
Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the
Settings | Control Panel menu option.
Clear Contents of Document Folder
Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
87
Control Panel Options
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel
Getting Help
Please click the “?” box to get Help when changing Control Panel options.
Option
Function
About
Displays hardware and software details.
Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, display or mouse functions.
Administrator
Control
AppLock configuration. (See Chapter 6, “AppLock”.)
Aironet Client Utility
Set the parameters for a Cisco radio. (See section “Start Menu
Program Options”, only present if Cisco radio software installed.)
Bluetooth
Discover and manage Bluetooth devices.
Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Date/Time
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by
LXE).
Display
Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme
properties.
Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Internet Options
Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups
options for Internet connectivity.
Keyboard
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
KeyPad
Remap keys to a single keypress, combination of keypresses or to
launch an application or command.
Mixer
Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input.
Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen.
MX3X-VXC
Options
Set various device specific configuration options.
Network and Dial
Up Options
Set network driver properties and network access properties.
Owner
Set VX6 owner details.
Password
Set VX6 access password properties.
PC Connection
Control the connection between the VX6 and a local desktop or laptop
computer.
PCMCIA
Manage PCMCIA cards.
Power
Displays the status of all power managed devices.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
88
Control Panel Options
Option
Function
Regional Settings
Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional
and language settings.
Remove Programs
Remove user installed programs in their entirety.
Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner
port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data
bits for available COM ports. (See Chapter 4, “Scanner”.)
Stylus
Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
System
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage
and Program memory settings.
Volume and Sounds
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE
events.
Wi-Fi
Set the parameters for a Summit radio. See Chapter 5, “Wireless
Network Configuration” for details on the SCU.
About
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | About
Displays hardware and software details.
Tab Title
Contents
Software
GUID, Windows Windows CE version, OAL Version, Bootloader Version,
Compile Version, FPGA Version and Language
Hardware
CPU Type, Codec Type, FPGA Version, Scanner type, Display, Flash memory,
and DRAM memory
Versions
LXE Utilities, LXE Drivers, LXE Image, LXE API, and Internet Explorer
Network IP
Current network connection IP and MAC address.
User application version information can be shown in the Version window. Version window
information is taken from the registry.
Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “VX6 Utilities”). LXE
recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of
the registry before changes are made.
The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \
LXE \ Version in the registry.
Create a new string value under this key. The string name should be the Application name to
appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in
the Version window.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
89
Language and Fonts
The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image.
Figure 3-3 About Properties, Software
The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab:
•
English only – No additional fonts are built into the OS
•
Japanese
•
Simplified Chinese
•
Traditional Chinese
•
Korean
The above listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built-in to the VX6 OS image. Built-in
fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup. Thai, Hebrew,
Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the (English only) default (extended) fonts.
When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the /System folder; the font works for Asian
web pages, the font works with RFTerm, the font does not work for Asian options in Regional
Settings control panel, the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names, the
font does not work for third-party .NET applications, the font does not work for some third-party
MFC applications.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
90
Control Panel Options
Identifying Software Versions
The “Versions” tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all
installed software installed on the VX6 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the
applications loaded on the VX6. The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software
installed. Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level (i.e.: in the example
below, the revision level is 2BT).
Figure 3-4 About Properties, Versions
Radio MAC Address
The “Network IP” tab displays the MAC address of the radio card.
Figure 3-5 About Properties, Network IP
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
91
Accessibility
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sound
function. There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Figure 3-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard
Note:
The StickyKeys option SHOULD NOT be used on the VX6. It does not work for the
integrated VX6 keyboard.
If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as
the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE
operating system.
.
Figure 3-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound
If the SoundSentry option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual
warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft
Windows CE operating system.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
92
Control Panel Options
Administrator Control
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single (or multi)
application devices. In other words, only the application(s) or feature(s) specified in the AppLock
configuration by the Administrator are available to the user.
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no
default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no
password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password
is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user
mode.
AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the
Administrator.
To set the AppLock parameters, please see Chapter 6, “AppLock” for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
93
Bluetooth
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth
Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices.
Factory Default Settings
Discovered Devices
Settings
Turn Off Bluetooth
Report when connection lost
Report when connected
Report failure to reconnect
Computer is connectable
Computer is discoverable
Prompt if devices request to pair
Continuous search
None
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are
discovered, pair, connect and disconnect. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices
re-connect with the mobile device.
•
The default Bluetooth setting is On and all options on the Settings Panel are enabled.
•
The VX6 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is
discoverable option is disabled (unchecked) on the Settings panel.
•
Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up to be NonDiscoverable or Invisible.
•
The mobile device can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer.
•
It is not necessary to disconnect a paired scanner and printer before a different
scanner or printer is paired with the VX6.
•
The Bluetooth device should be as close as possible (line of sight) to the mobile
device during the pairing process.
Assumption:
The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth
devices for the VX6. The VX6 operating system has been upgraded to the revision level required
for Bluetooth client operation.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
94
Control Panel Options
Discover
Figure 3-8 Control Panel - Bluetooth
Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.
Discovery process also queries for the unique identifier for each device discovered.
The
Figure 3-9 Discover Bluetooth Devices
Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
95
Bluetooth Devices
A device previously discovered and paired with the VX6 is shown in the Bluetooth Devices panel.
Figure 3-10 Bluetooth Devices Panel
Note:
When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode, is turned Off or leaves the VX6
Bluetooth scanning range, the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the
VX6 is lost. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the
VX6.
The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon. Discovered devices
without an icon can be paired as printers or scanners; the Bluetooth panel will assign an icon to
the device name.
An icon with a red background indicates the device Bluetooth connection is inactive.
An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the VX6 and the device
Bluetooth connection is active.
Doubletap a device in the list to open the device properties menu. The targeted device does not
need to be active.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
96
Control Panel Options
Figure 3-11 Bluetooth Device Disconnect / Delete
Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX6 to receive data from the scanner.
Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX6 to send data to the printer.
Tap Disconnect to stop the connection between the VX6 and a paired Bluetooth device.
Tap Delete to remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list. The device name and
identifier is removed from the VX6 Bluetooth Devices panel after the user taps OK.
Bluetooth Device Properties
Figure 3-12 Bluetooth Device Properties Menu
Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by the user. The data displayed is the
result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process.
The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
97
Settings
Figure 3-13 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel
Turn Off Bluetooth Button
Tap the button to toggle Bluetooth hardware On or Off. The default value is Bluetooth On.
Options
Option
Default
Information
Report when
connection lost
Enabled
There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection
between a paired, active device is lost. A visual signal may
be a dialog box placed on the display. Tap the X button or
OK button to close the dialog box.
Report when
reconnected
Disabled
There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection
between a paired, active device is re-connected. A visual
signal may be a dialog box placed on the display. Tap the X
button or OK button to close the dialog box.
Report failure to
reconnect
Enabled
The time delay is 30 minutes. This value cannot be changed
by the user. There may be an audio or visual signal when a
connection between a paired, active device is re-connected.
A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display.
Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box.
Possible reasons for failure to reconnect: Timeout expired
without reconnecting; attempted to pair with a device that is
currently paired with another device; attempted to pair with
a known device that moved out of range or was turned off;
attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why
reconnect failed is unknown.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
98
Control Panel Options
Option
Default
Information
Computer is
connectable
Enabled
Disable this option to inhibit VX6 connection with all
Bluetooth devices.
Computer is
discoverable
Disabled
Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the
VX6.
Prompt if devices
request to pair
Disabled
When enabled, a dialog box is placed on the display. Tap
the X button, OK button or No button to close the dialog
box.
Note:
In some cases, if a Bluetooth device is already
paired this setting cannot be changed. If this is the
case, an error message is displayed and the option
is not changed. The Bluetooth device must be
disconnected before changing this setting.
Continuous Search
Disabled
When enabled, the VX6 never stops searching for paired
Bluetooth devices that have lost connection. When
disabled, the VX6 stops searching after ½ hour.
Computer Friendly
Name
Empty
The name, or identifier, entered in this space by the System
Administrator is used exclusively by Bluetooth devices and
during Bluetooth communication.
Note:
The Device Name listed in Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Device Name is not
used during Bluetooth operation. Owner Identification name listed in Start | Settings |
Control Panel | Owner | Identification is not used during Bluetooth operation.
About
Figure 3-14 Bluetooth About Panel
This panel lists the assigned Computer Friendly Name (that other devices may discover during
their Discovery and Query process), the Bluetooth MAC address, and software version levels. The
data cannot be edited by the user.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
99
Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect
The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the end-user taps the
Discover button. It can auto-reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of
and then returned within range. Pairing supports SPP devices only.
Up to two Bluetooth devices can be connected to the VX6 at a time; LXE supports one scanner
and one printer (see Accessories).
Taskbar Icon
Legend
Bluetooth is ready to connect
or
Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted
Bluetooth device(s).
VX6 is not connected to another Bluetooth device
or
VX6 is out of range of all targeted Bluetooth device(s). Connection
is inactive.
Note:
Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry.
Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and autoreconnect events.
AppLock, if installed, does not stop the end-user from using the Bluetooth application, nor does it
stop other Bluetooth-enabled devices from pairing with the VX6 while AppLock is in control. See
Chapter 6 – AppLock for more information.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
100
Control Panel Options
Certificates
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX6 user. These values may change based on the type
of radio security resident in the client, access point or the host system.
Date/Time
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Factory Default Settings
Current Time
Midnight
Time Zone
GMT-05:00
Daylight Savings Disabled
Figure 3-15 Date/Time Properties
There is little change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the settings
and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear.
If an Internet connection is available, click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server.
The VX6 includes a GrabTime utility:
VX6 Reference Guide
•
GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this
control panel.
•
GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up. Please see
“Enabling GrabTime”, later in this chapter, for details.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
101
Dialing
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing
Figure 3-16 Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the “?” and
follow the instructions in Help.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
102
Control Panel Options
Display
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon
Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties.
Factory Default Settings
Background
Tile
Appearance
Scheme:
Backlight
Battery Auto Turn Off
Idle Time
External Auto Turn Off
Idle Time
Windowsce
Disable
Windows Standard
Enabled
30 seconds
Enabled
2 minutes
Background
There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Adjust the
settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Appearance
No change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Appearance options. Adjust the settings
and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The default is
Windows Standard.
Backlight
Figure 3-17 Display Properties / Backlight Tab
Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. When the backlight timer expires, the display, display backlight and keyboard
backlight are all turned off.
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to which the VX6 is
mounted is in motion. This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled
using the Scanner control panel. Please see “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 4
“Scanner”, for details.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
103
Input Panel
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Factory Default Settings
Input Method
Allow applications to
change input panel state
Keys
Use gestures
Keyboard
Disabled
Small keys
Disabled
Figure 3-18 Input Panel Properties
Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data.
Selecting Keyboard enables both.
The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the input panel, make sure the checkbox for
“Allow applications to change input panel state” is checked and warmboot the VX6.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
104
Control Panel Options
Internet Options
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options
settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups options for Internet
connectivity.
Factory Default Settings
General
Start Page
Search Page
Cache Size
User Agent
Connection
Use LAN
Autodial Name
Proxy Server
Bypass Proxy
Security
Allow cookies
Allow TLS 1.0 security
Allow SSL 2.0 security
Allow SSL 3.0 security
Warn when switching
Privacy
First party cookies
Third party cookies
Session cookies
Advanced
Stylesheets
Theming Support
Multimedia
Security
Popups
Block popups
Display notification
Use same window
http://www.lxe.com/
http://www.google.com
512 Kb
Windows CE
Disabled
Blank
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Accept
Prompt
Always allow
Enable
Enable
All options enabled
All options enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Select a tab. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
105
Keyboard
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Factory Default Settings
Repeat
Enable
Delay
Short
Rate
Slow
Key Map
Default
There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on
the Keyboard Panel.
These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
106
Control Panel Options
KeyPad
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel: KeyPad Icon
Use this option to assign key functions to mappable keys and specify application launch or run
command key sequences.
Factory Default Settings
KeyMap
Modifier Mode
None
Key
F1
Remapped Key
F1
Key Sequence
Null
LaunchApp
App1-App4
Null
App/Opt
exe
RunCmd
Cmd1-Cmd4
Null
File/Parm
file
KeyMap
Tap the OK button to save changes. Tap the X button to ignore changes and return to the Control
Panel.
Figure 3-19 KeyPad Properties / KeyMap Tab
Modifier Mode
Available modifier keys are None, Shift and 2nd + Shift. The
default value is None.
Key
The key to be remapped, valid keys alone or with a modifier key:
F1 through F10
Scan Key Left
Scan Key Right
Enter
. (Decimal)
Remapped Key
A key can be remapped to:
any single key in the drop down list,
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
107
a Key Sequence (string of keys)
an application (LaunchApp)
a command (RunCmd).
Key Sequence
The Key Sequence textbox displays the results of the keypress if a
Key Sequence, LaunchApp or RunCmd is mapped to the keypress.
For more information, please see the How To sections later in this chapter.
LaunchApp
The default for all text boxes is Null. The text boxes accept string values only.
Click the exe radio button to enter the name of the application to launch.
Click the opt radio button to enter any options for the application launch.
Figure 3-20 KeyMap Properties / LaunchApp Tab
For more information, please see How To: Remap an Application Launch, later in this section.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The executable file and options are not checked for accuracy. If the launch fails, the
device emits a single beep
VX6 Reference Guide
108
Control Panel Options
RunCmd
The default for all text boxes is Null. The text boxes accept string values only.
Click the file radio button to enter the name of the command to launch.
Click the parm radio button to specify parameters for the command.
Figure 3-21 KeyMap Properties / RunCmd Tab
For more information, please see How To: Remap an Application Launch, later in this section.
How To: Remap a Single Key
1.
On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options.
2.
Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list.
3.
Select the value from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list.
4.
Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control.
How To: Remap a Key Sequence
1.
On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options.
2.
Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list.
3.
Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pulldown list.
4.
Select the first key of the string from the pulldown list. Press the Add button to add the key to
the string shown in the Key Sequence box. Repeat this step until all keys desired have been
added to the key sequence. If necessary, use the Clear button to erase all entries in the Key
Sequence box.
5.
Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control.
How To: Remap an Application Launch
1.
On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options.
2.
Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list.
3.
Select Launch App1-4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list.
4.
Click on the LaunchApp tab.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
109
5.
Make sure the EXE radio button is selected.
6.
In the text box (App1-4) corresponding to the number selected for Launch App1-4, enter the
application to launch.
7.
If any parameters are needed for the application, click on the OPT radio button. This clears
the text box (though the application name is saved). Enter the desired parameters in the
appropriate text box.
8.
Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control.
9.
If the KeyMap tab is accessed again, the application (plus any specified parameters) is
displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected.
How To: Remap a Command
1.
On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options.
2.
Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list.
3.
Select RunCmd 1-4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list.
4.
Click on the RunCmd tab.
5.
Make sure the FILE radio button is selected.
6.
In the text box (Cmd1-4) corresponding to the number selected for RunCmd1-4, enter the
desired command.
7.
If any parameters are needed for the command, click on the PARM radio button. This clears
the text box (though the command is saved). Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate
text box.
8.
Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control.
9.
If the KeyMap tab is accessed again, the command (plus any specified parameters) is
displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
110
Control Panel Options
Mixer
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mixer Icon
Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input.
Factory Default Settings
Master Volume 0dB
Record Gain
22.5dB
Sidetone
12.0dB
Input
None
Input Boost
Disabled
Figure 3-22 Mixer
Select the Input for the mixer. Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level. Tap OK to save the
settings.
The following options are available for Input
•
None – No microphone. Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the
device.
•
Mic1 – Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the
device.
•
Bluetooth – Reserved for future use.
When checked, (enabled) Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20
dB. Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
111
Mouse
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen.
MX3X-VXC Options
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | MX3X-VXC Options
Set options such as IP V6, time sync, touchscreen enable and CapsLock.
It may be necessary to warmboot the VX6 after making desired changes. A pop up window
indicates if a warmboot is required.
Communication
Options on this tab configure communication options for the VX6.
Figure 3-23 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Communication Tab
Enable TCP/IP Version 6
By default, IPv6 is disabled on the LXE device. Check this checkbox to enable IPv6.
Allow Remote Desktop Autologon
By default, Remote Desktop Autologon is disabled. Check this checkbox to enable Remote
Desktop Autologon.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The .RDP file must be saved in the \System folder. When prompted, use the Save As
button to save the .RDP file is the \System directory. If the .RDP file is saved in the
default root folder location, the .RDP file will not persist across a warmboot.
VX6 Reference Guide
112
Control Panel Options
Autolaunch TimeSync
By default, TimeSync does not automatically run on the VX6. To enable TimeSync to run
automatically on the VX6, check this checkbox.
Synchronize with a Local Time Server
By default, GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection. To synchronize with a local time
server:
1.
Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime.ini from the My Device | Windows folder on the mobile
device to the host PC.
2.
Edit the copy of GrabTime.ini on the host PC. Add the local time server’s domain name to
the beginning of the list of servers. You can optionally delete the remainder of the list.
3.
Copy the modified GrabTime.ini file to the My Device | System folder on the mobile
device.
The System/GrabTime.ini file takes precedence over the Windows/GrabTime.ini file.
System/Grabtime.ini also persists after a coldboot; Windows/Grabtime.ini does not persist.
Misc
Options on this tab configure device specific options. Note that options not available on the VX6
are grayed out.
Figure 3-24 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Misc Tab
CapsLock
By default, CapsLock is disabled after a warmboot. To enable CapsLock after a warmboot, check
this checkbox.
Touch Screen Disable
By default, the VX6 touchscreen is enabled. To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot, check
this checkbox.
Touch Screen Heater Disable
By default, the VX6 touchscreen heater is enabled. To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot,
check this checkbox.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
113
Status Popup
Figure 3-25 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Status Popup Tab
When the Status popup window is displayed, it is placed on top of the window in focus and hides
any data beneath it. It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key
sequence.
Using the KeyPad control panel (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keypad), the System
Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end-user when they want to
toggle the Status Popup Window on or off. The System Administrator must also assign a Status
Admin key sequence to perform the same function.
Status popup window display options (taskbar icons) are assigned on the Status Popup tab. E.g.
AC Power, ActiveSync, WLAN radio, CapsLock, Network status, Bluetooth status, etc.
The default is for the User and Admin status popup windows to show all status information. The
5 second timeout to remove the status popup from the display is disabled by default for the User
and Admin status popup windows.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
114
Control Panel Options
Network and Dialup Connections
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections
Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection on the VX6.
To configure the VX6 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address, select the desired connection. The
default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP.
A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP address radio button and entering
the desired IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
Figure 3-26 Network Connection Properties
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
115
Owner
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon
Set VX6 owner details.
Factory Default Settings
Identification
Blank
Notes
Blank
There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Figure 3-27 Owner Properties
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
116
Control Panel Options
Password
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon
Set VX6 access/power up password properties.
Factory Default Settings
Password
Blank
At Power On
Disabled
Note:
Once a password is assigned, the Owner and Password Control Panel options require
the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you
forget the password, it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit
(which erases all memory).
Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes. The
password is immediately in effect.
Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On.
Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver.
If there is no screensaver chosen, this checkbox is ignored.
Note:
Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers.
Figure 3-28 Password Properties
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
117
PC Connection
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Control the connection between the VX6 and a nearby desktop/laptop computer.
Factory Default Settings
Allow Connection
Enabled
Connect Using
‘USB Client’
Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
Unchecking the “Allow connection with …..” disables ActiveSync.
Change ….
Clicking Change lists configured ActiveSync connections. In addition, there is a checkbox for
Automatic Connect. This option applies to USB connection only. If this checkbox is checked,
when the USB cable is connected, the VX6 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the
USB port. Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time.
Figure 3-29 Communication / PC Connection Tab
Please refer to the “Backup VX6 Files” section later in this chapter for parameter setting
recommendations.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
118
Control Panel Options
PCMCIA
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA
Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots. Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and
the Compact Flash slot is provided.
Factory Default Settings
Disable slot now
Unchecked
The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters. If a card is present in the slot, a
description of the card is displayed. To disable a slot, check the Disable slot now checkbox and
tap OK. The change takes effect immediately. Slot 0 is the lower slot, labeled “PCMCIA B”. Slot
1 is the upper slot, labeled “PCMCIA A”.
Figure 3-30 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1
The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive. There are no user
configurable options.
Figure 3-31 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
119
Power
Depending on the Software Revision, some devices may have a Schemes tab.
Factory Default Settings
Switch state to User Idle
Switch state to System Idle
Switch state to Suspen
Never
Never
Never
The Schemes tab can be used to control the display and shut the VX6 Off. The mode timers are
cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired
and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. For
example, if the User Idle timer is set to Never, the power scheme timers never place the device in
User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes.
For a VX6, the User Idle state turns off the display, display backlight and keyboard. There is no
System Idle mode so the VX6 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer expires or a
primary even occurs.
Please see “Power Modes” in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”.
IMPORTANT: There is no Suspend mode on the VX6. If the Suspend timer is enabled, the
VX6 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires.
Figure 3-32 Power Properties
The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices. Note that since the VX6
does not support power management, all devices show the “high” power level. There are no user
options on this screen.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
120
Control Panel Options
Regional Settings
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings
Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings.
No change from general desktop PC Regional Settings Properties options. Adjust the settings and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Options (and defaults) for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image.
Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details.
A language must be installed before it can be selected. After selecting a language to use, and after
all changes are made, tap OK to save your changes then warmboot the device.
Factory Default Settings
Regional Settings
Your Locale
Number
Currency
Time
Date
User Interface Language
User Interface Language
Input Language
Input Language
Installed Input Languages
English (United States)
123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg
$123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg
h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM)
M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long
Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting)
Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting)
English (US)
Tap the Customize button to set Number, Currency, Time and Date format for the selected
Locale. User Interface Language determines the language used for the menus, dialogs and alerts.
Select the Default Input Language to use when the device is rebooted.
Remove Programs
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs
No change from general desktop Remove Programs options. Select a program and click Remove.
Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed only programs. The change takes
effect immediately.
Scanner
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings.
Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports.
To set the Scanner parameters, please see Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
121
Stylus
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus
Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Double Tap
Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Calibration
Figure 3-33 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start
Figure 3-34 Stylus Properties / Recalibration
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
122
Control Panel Options
System
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory
settings.
Factory Default Settings
General
N/A
Memory
1/3 storage, 2/3 program memory
Device Name
VXC0001
Device
LXE_VXC
Description
Copyrights
N/A
General
Figure 3-35 System / General tab
System:
This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be
changed by the user.
Computer:
The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of
the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and
the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user.
Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system
with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE
operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the
internal ATA card used for storage.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
123
Memory
Figure 3-36 System / Memory
Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a
file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the VX6 is running slowly, try increasing the
amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
Device Name
Figure 3-37 System / Device Name
The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the
keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Copyrights
This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by
the user.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
124
Control Panel Options
Terminal Server Client Licenses
Select a server client license from a drop down list
Not available at this release.
Volume and Sounds
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds Icon
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events.
Factory Default Settings
Volume
Events
Enabled
Application
Enabled
Notifications
Enabled
Volume
Middle of Bar
Key click
Loud
Screen tap
Loud
Sounds
Scheme
LOUD!
Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Figure 3-38 Volume and Sounds
Wi-Fi
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Wi-Fi
Provides access to the Summit Client Utility (SCU). For details on the SCU, please see Chapter
5, Wireless Network Configuration.
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
This Control Panel icon is not present with some versions of the SCU.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs
125
CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs
The Flash card, located under the main battery pack, is intended to protect the user from losing the
LXE drivers and configuration information in the event of a cold boot. Also, on any boot, the
contents of any registered CAB files are automatically unpacked.
Access Files on the Flash Card
Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop then tap the System icon.
Files
A flash card is used for permanent storage of the LXE drivers and utilities. It is also used for
registry content back up. The flash card is located in the socket under the main battery pack.
CAB files, when executed, are not deleted.
SUMMIT.CAB
Summit Client files needed for network card operation.
The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present:
BLUETOOTH.CAB
Bluetooth Client files needed for LXEZ Pairing operation.
LXE_VX3C_ENABLER.CAB Wavelink Avalanche Enabler.
RFTERM.CAB
RFTerm terminal emulation application.
JAVA.CAB
Java application.
APPLOCK.CAB
AppLock program. See Chapter 6 “AppLock”.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Always perform a warm reset (Start / Run / Warmboot) when exchanging one flash card
for another.
VX6 Reference Guide
126
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher, you can synchronize information on your
desktop computer with the VX6 and vice versa. Synchronization compares the data on your VX6
with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data.
For example, you can:
•
Back up and restore your device data.
•
Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your device and desktop computer.
•
Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For
example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop
computer or only when you choose the synchronize command.
If the VX6 is connected to a PC by a RS-232 or USB cable, disconnect the cable from the VX6
and reconnect.
Check that the correct connection is selected (Serial or USB “Client”).
Note:
By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use
ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize. The
synchronization process makes the data (in the information types you select) identical on
both your desktop computer and your device.
When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer, the ActiveSync Setup
Wizard begins and starts the following processes:
•
connect your device to your desktop computer,
•
set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your device and
your desktop computer, and
•
customize your synchronization settings.
Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device, your first synchronization process begins
automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard.
Prerequisites
VX6 and ActiveSync Partnership
A partnership between the VX6 and ActiveSync has been established. See section “ActiveSync –
Initial Setup” in Chapter 1 “Introduction”, “Getting Started”.
Serial Port Transfer
VX6 Reference Guide
•
A desktop or laptop PC with an available serial port and a VX6 with a serial port.
The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000 or XP.
•
Null modem cable with all control lines connected. LXE recommends using the null
modem cable part number listed in Chapter 1 “Introduction”, subsection
“Accessories”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
127
USB Transfer
•
A desktop or laptop PC with an available USB port and a VX6 with a USB port. The
desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2, 2000 or XP.
•
A standard USB cable with a type A plug on one end, and a type B plug on the
other.
Connect
Connect the modem cable to the PC (the host) and the VX6 (the client). Select “Connect” from the
Start Menu on the VX6 (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect).
Note:
Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM
ports to establish a connection for the first time.
Note:
USB will start automatically when the cable is connected, not requiring you to select
“Connect” from the Start menu.
Explore
From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC, click on the Explore button, which allows you to
explore the VX6 from the PC side, with some limitations. You can copy files to or from the VX6
by drag-and-drop. You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the \Windows
directory on the VX6. (Technically, the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as
system files in the original build of the Windows CE image. This, however, includes most of the
files in the \Windows directory).
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
128
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
Disconnect
Serial Connection
•
•
Disconnect the cable from the VX6.
Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click
the Disconnect button.
•
•
Disconnect the cable from the VX6.
Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click
the Disconnect button.
•
Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click
the Disconnect button.
USB Connection
Radio Connection
Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection
ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a client and a host computer. A partnership is defined
by two objects -- a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership
is first created. An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two
hosts.
If the VX6 is cold booted, the random number is deleted – and the partnership with the last one of
the two hosts is also deleted. The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all
devices having a partnership with it. Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if
they have the same name. (Control Panel | System | Device Name)
If the cold booted VX6 tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC, a new random
number is generated for the VX6 and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the VX6 be
changed. If the VX6 is associated with a second host, changing the name will destroy that
partnership as well. This can cause some confusion when re-establishing partnerships with hosts.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
129
Troubleshooting
ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect, but it cannot identify it.
One or more control lines are not connected. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or
other device, it may indicate a bad serial port.
ActiveSync indicator on the host (disc in the toolbar tray) turns green and spins as soon as you
connect the cable, before clicking the Connect icon (or REPLLOG.EXE in the Windows
directory).
One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly. This is usually a cable problem, but on a
laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port.
ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins, but connection never occurs
Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host. Try forcing ActiveSync on the
desktop PC to use a specific baud rate and set the VX6 to use the same baud rate.
-orIncorrect or broken data lines in cable.
ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray
The host doesn’t know you are trying to connect. May mean a bad cable, with no control lines
connected, or an incompatible baud rate. Try the connection again, with a known-good cable.
Testing connection with a terminal emulator program, or a serial port monitor
You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of
ActiveSync. Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bits, and the same baud rate as
the connection on the CE device. After double-clicking REPLLOG.EXE on the CE device, the
word “CLIENT” appears on the display in ASCII format. When using a serial port monitor, you
see the host echo “CLIENT”, followed by “SERVER”. After this point, the data stream becomes
straight (binary) PPP.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
130
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
Create a Communication Option
1.
On the VX6, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections. A
window is displayed showing the existing connections.
2.
Assuming the one you want does not exist, double-click Make New Connection.
3.
Give the new connection an appropriate name. Click the Direct Connection radio button.
Click the Next button.
4.
From the popup menu, choose the port you want to connect to. Only the available ports are
shown.
5.
Click the Configure... button.
6.
Under the Port Settings tab, choose the appropriate baud rate. Data bits, parity, and stop bits
remain at 8, none, and 1, respectively.
7.
Under the Call Options tab, be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone, since a direct connection
will not have a dial tone. Set the timeout parameter (default is 90 seconds). Click OK.
8.
TCP/IP Settings should not need to change from defaults. Click the Finish button to create
the new connection.
9.
Close the Remote Networking window.
10. To activate the new connection select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection and
click the Change button.
11. Select the new connection. Click OK twice.
12. Close the Control Panel window.
13. Connect the desktop PC to the VX6 with the appropriate cable.
14. Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection.
You can activate the connection by double-clicking on the specific connection icon in the Remote
Networking window, but this will only start an RAS (Remote Access Services) session, and does
not start ActiveSync properly.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync
131
Technical Specifications – Connection Cable
The exact serial cable is crucial. Many commercial null modem cables will not work. LXE
recommends the following cable:
Serial cable:
9000A054CBL6D9D9
5
9
1
6
Pinout:
DB9 female
DB9 female
1
7
2
3
3
2
4
6, 8
5
5
6, 8
4
7
1
9
no connection
Figure 3-39 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization
Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port – the laptop
connection will not work.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
132
VX6 Utilities
VX6 Utilities
The following files are pre-loaded by LXE.
LAUNCH.EXE
All applications to be installed into persistent memory are normally in the form of Windows CE
CAB files. These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image, and need to be
copied to the mobile device using an internal ATA card or from a PC using ActiveSync. The CAB
files are loaded into the folder System, which is the internal ATA drive.
Then, information is added to the registry, if desired, to make the CAB file auto-launch at startup.
The CAB file can update the registry as desired and cause the unpacked file(s) to be placed in the
appropriate location.
The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ SOFTWARE \ LXE
\ Persist, as follows. The main subkey is any text, and is a description of the file. Then 3 values
are added:
FileName is the name of the CAB file, with the path (usually \System)
Installed is a DWORD value of 0, which changes to 1 once auto-launch installs the file
FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed.
The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files (with path) installed by the CAB file. Since
the CAB file installs into DRAM, when memory is lost this file is lost, and the CAB file must be
reinstalled.
Three optional fields are also added: Order, Delay, and PCMCIA. These are all DWORD fields,
described below.
The auto-launch process goes as follows. The launch utility opens the registry database and reads
the list of CAB files to auto-launch. First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present. If
not, the registry entry is ignored. If it is present, and the Installed flag is not set, auto-launch
makes a copy of the CAB file (since it gets deleted by installation), and runs the Microsoft utility
WCELOAD to install it. If the Installed flag is set, auto-launch looks for the FileCheck file. If it
is present, the CAB file is installed, and that registry entry is complete. If the FileCheck file is not
present, memory has been lost, and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file. Then,
the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry, until all registry entries are analyzed.
To force execution every time (for example, for AUTOEXEC.BAT), use a FileCheck of
“dummy”, which will never be found, forcing the item to execute.
For persist keys specifying .EXE or .BAT files, the executing process will be started, and then
Launch will continue, leaving the loading process to run independently. For other persist keys
(including .CAB files), Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing.
This is important, for example, to ensure that a .CAB file is installed before the .EXE files from
the .CAB file are run.
The Order field is used to force a sequence of events; Order=0 is first, and Order=99 is last.
Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass, but not in a predictable
sequence. Note: If the order of loading is not critical, it may be easier to use the \System\Startup
folder instead; see below.
The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded, before the next is loaded. The delay
is given in seconds, and defaults to 0 if not specified. If the install fails (or the file to be installed
is not found), the delay does not occur.
The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file (usually a CAB file) being loaded is a wireless
client driver, and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded. By default, the
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Utilities
133
PCMCIA slots are off on powerup, to prevent the “Unidentified PCMCIA Slot” dialog from
appearing. Once the drivers are loaded, the slot can be turned on. The value in the PCMCIA field
is a DWORD, representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file, but before
activating the slot (a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation). The
default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on. The default values for the default wireless
client drivers (listed below) is 1, meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and
the slot powering up.
Note that the auto-launch process can also launch batch files (*.BAT), executable files (*.EXE),
registry setting files (*.REG), or sound files (*.WAV). The mechanism is the same as listed
above, but the appropriate CE application is called, depending on file type.
Registry information is already in the default image for the following:
;; ------- autoexec batch file - for users convenience
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AUTOEXEC]
"FileName"="\\System\\Autoexec.bat"
"Installed"=dword:0
"FileCheck"="ALWAYSEXEC"
"Order"=dword:50
;; The file name “ALWAYSEXEC” or “dummy” does not really matter as long as there is
;; no file of that name in the directory. You can use any name that you want for this entry
;; as long as it is a non existent file name. The purpose of this value is that if someone
;; wants to only execute this file one time then you would replace the value of FileCheck
;; with the name of a file that would exist the next time a warm boot occurs.
;; ------- RFTerm support
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\LXE TE]
"FileName"="\\System\\RFTERM.CAB"
"Installed"=dword:0
"FileCheck"="\\WINDOWS\\LXE\\RFTERM.EXE"
"Order"=dword:11
;; run the app after it has loaded and client device is ready
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\RFTERM]
"FileName"="\\WINDOWS\\LXE\\RFTERM.EXE"
"Installed"=dword:0
"FileCheck"="ALWAYSEXEC"
"Order"=dword:40
"Delay"=dword:1
When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device’s operating sytem, refer to the
default image segments that are commented with “… RFTERM …” to see the expected Registry
format.
One special key is included to force the system folders (Desktop, Fonts, Programs, etc.) to copy
from the internal ATA card (\System) to the \Windows directory. This is implemented as a persist
key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled (especially for AppLock). The filename is
a special internal trigger for the Launch utility, to activate the CopyFolders function. DO NOT
EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY, OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION. You may however change
the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence.
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\COPYFOLDERS]
“FileName”=”COPYFOLDERS”
“FileCheck”=””
“Order”=dword:0F
To have files (CAB, EXE, REG, or WAV files) loaded on startup, when sequence of execution is
not important, you can put these files in the \System\Startup folder (on the internal ATA card).
This is parsed by the Launch utility, and these programs are started or executed.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
134
VX6 Utilities
REGEDIT.EXE
Registry Editor – LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends
making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made.
REGLOAD.EXE
Double-tapping a registry settings file (e.g. REG) causes RegLoad to open the file and make the
indicated settings in the registry. This is similar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC. The
.REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC.
REGDUMP.EXE
Registry dump – Saves a copy of the registry as a text file. The file, REG.TXT, is located in the
root folder.
Note:
The REG.TXT file is not saved in persistent storage. To use the REG.TXT file as a
reference in the even of a coldboot, LXE recommends copying the file to the \SYSTEM
directory on the VX6 or storing a copy of the file on a PC.
WARMBOOT.EXE
Double click this file to warm boot the computer (i.e., all RAM is preserved). It automatically
saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost.
WAVPLAY.EXE
Double tapping a sound file (e.g. WAV) causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the
background.
VX6 Command-line Utilites
Command line utilities can be executed by Start | Run | [program name].
COLDBOOT.EXE
Command line utility which performs a cold boot (all RAM is erased).
Passwords are lost upon cold boot. If a password is set, that password must be entered to begin the
cold boot power cycle process.
PrtScrn.EXE
Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in .BMP format in the
\System folder. Click Start | Run and type prtscrn and click OK, or press Enter. There is a 10
second delay before the screen print is made. The device beeps and screen captured file
(scrnnnnn.bmp) is placed in the \System folder. The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each
time the PrtScrn function is activated. The command is not case-sensitive.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
API Calls
135
API Calls
See Also:
LXE CE API Programming Guide E-SW-WINAPIPG
The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE-specific API calls for the VX6. It
is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation. Details of
many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft’s documentation.
The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in the file LXEAPI.DLL, which is
in the standard Windows CE image on the VX6.
For ease of software development, the files LXEAPI.H and LXEAPI.LIB are available on the
accessories CD, which are the C/C++ include files and the link library for the DLL, respectively.
A full SDK is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C++ 4.0 (which is available free on
the Microsoft website).
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
136
Reflash the VX6
Reflash the VX6
Note:
When reflashing, LXE recommends using a Compact Flash (CF) card that is greater
than 64MB. Files to be loaded on the CF card are: NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT
Requirements:
•
A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE)
•
PCMCIA to CF card adapter
Preparation
•
LXE recommends that installation of the CF card be performed on a clean, well-lit
surface.
•
Loosen the captive screws securing the user access panel cover. The cover is
tethered to the VX6.
Caution
!
Make sure the VX6 has an uninterrupted power connection before beginning the
reflash procedure. Loss of power during the reflash process can result in
corrupted files.
IMPORTANT – Please contact LXE Customer Support for information on upgrading Windows
CE .NET to Windows CE 5.0. These instructions are only valid for upgrading to a newer
revision of the same operating system.
How To: Reflash using Keypress Method
1.
Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA
slot next to the radio.
2.
Double-click My Computer, then Storage Card folder.
3.
Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy.
4.
Tap Back Arrow. Doubleclick \System folder.
5.
Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, click Yes to All.
6.
When the copy process finishes, remove the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card.
7.
Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. Click OK.
8.
Before the splash screen appears, press and hold down the <A> key. Continue to hold it down
until the displays shows “Writing to boot flash”
Note:
9.
If you do not press and hold the <A> key quickly enough, the display shows
“Loading OS Image”. Reboot and press and hold the <A> key again.
The VX6 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is
displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are
complete
10. Secure the user access cover using the captive screws.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Reflash the VX6
137
How To: Reflash using TAG file Method
S
This method requires software revision 2BT or greater. To identify the software
revision, please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel.
1.
Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA
slot next to the radio.
2.
Double-click My Computer, then Storage Card folder.
3.
Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy.
4.
Tap Back Arrow. Doubleclick \System folder.
5.
Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, click Yes to All.
6.
Additionally a REFLASH.TAG file is needed to trigger the reflash. This file can be created
on the VX6 or copied to it along with the system files. The contents of the file are
unimportant; but the file must be named REFLASH.TAG and it must be in the \System folder
with the new system load.
7.
When the copy process finishes, remove the he PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card.
8.
Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. Click OK.
9.
When booting, the VX6 looks for a file named REFLASH.TAG in the \System folder.
When this file is encountered, the VX6 loads a new bootloader image (eboot.nb0) into the
boot flash. The tag file is deleted and the VX6 is rebooted to begin using the new boot loader.
If there is no .nb0 file it does not re-flash and deletes the REFLASH.TAG.
10. The VX6 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is
displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are
complete
11. Secure the user access cover using the captive screws.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
138
Clearing Persistent Storage
Clearing Persistent Storage
The coldboot utility sets all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults. No other clearing is
available or necessary.
Network Configuration
There are two networking options available for the VX6:
•
Wireless radios
•
Ethernet (RJ-45) connector.
Wireless Radios
Please refer Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for information on configuring the
Summit, Cisco or Symbol radio.
Ethernet Connector
When the VX6 is networked using the Ethernet connector, the VX6’s networking options are set
via the Microsoft Windows CE Control Panel.
For more information on configuring the Microsoft Windows CE network
settings, please refer to the Windows CE Help feature or commercially available
Windows networking literature.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
139
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
A VX6 device manufactured before October 2006 must have drivers and system files upgraded
before it can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for
details on upgrading the mobile device baseline.
If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler
should not be installed on the mobile device.
Briefly . . .
The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE;
however, the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically. The installation
application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation
application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance.
Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch application. This behavior
can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface.
Enabler Install Process
Enabler Install Process
•
Doubletap the LXE_VXC_ENABLER.CAB file in the System folder.
•
Warm boot the mobile device.
Because the VX6 has two possible network adapters (the internal adapter for a cabled network
connection and the wireless network card), the Enabler uses the first network adapter it discovers.
In order to assure the Enabler uses the wireless connection, perform one of the following actions:
•
Select the Adapters tab in the Enabler setup (See “Enabler Configuration”, later in
this chapter) and make sure the wireless adapter is selected for Current Adapter.
•
To disable the internal network adapter, create a file in the \system directory named
NoEther.tag. The contents of the file are unimportant; but the file must be named
NoEhter.tag and it must be in the \system directory. (If the \system directory
contains a file named Ether.tag, you can rename this file to NoEther.tag instead of
creating a new file). After creating the file, coldboot the VX6. After the VX6
finishes booting, the internal Ethernet adapter is disabled. The restore the adapter,
delete the NoEther.tag file and coldboot and the VX6.
Enabler Uninstall Process
To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device:
•
Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder.
•
Warm boot the mobile device.
The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running. See Stop the Enabler
Service. If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder, warm boot the
mobile device, immediately delete the Avalanche folder, and then perform another warm boot.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
140
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Stop the Enabler Service
To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Management MC Console:
1.
Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop.
2.
Select File | Settings. Enter the password.
3.
Select the Startup/Shutdown tab.
4.
Select the “Do not monitor or launch Enabler” parameter to prevent automatic monitoring
upon startup.
5.
Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon
exiting the user interface.
6.
Click the OK button to save the changes.
7.
Reboot the device if necessary.
Update Monitoring Overview
There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the
Mobile Device Server running on the host machine.
•
Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server and the LXE device.
•
Wired via a USB connection, using ActiveSync, between the Mobile Device Server
and the mobile device.
•
Wirelessly via the radio and an access point
After installing the Enabler on the mobile unit, a reboot is required for the Enabler to begin
normal functionality. Following a mobile device reboot, the Enabler searches for an Mobile
Device Server, first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network. The
designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche Mobility Center Manager is LXE_VXC.
The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COM1, COM2, and
COM3. “Agent not found” will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a serial
port is not present or available (COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet
in the Control Panel).
The wireless connection is made using the default radio interface on the mobile device therefore
the device must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed. If a
Mobile Device Server is found, the Enabler will automatically attempt to apply all wireless and
network settings from the active profile. The Enabler will also automatically download and
process all available packages.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
141
Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings
Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established, the Enabler will attempt to apply
all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile. The success of the application of
settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler. These
local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console.
The default Enabler adapter control setting are:
•
Manage network settings – enabled
•
Use Avalanche network profile – enabled
•
Manage wireless settings – disabled for Windows CE Units
To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings:
1.
Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop.
2.
Select File | Settings. Enter the password.
3.
Select the Adapters tab.
4.
Choose settings for the “Use Manual Settings” parameter.
5.
Choose settings for “Manage Network Settings”, “Manage Wireless Settings” and “Use
Avalanche Network Profile”.
6.
Click the OK button to save the changes.
7.
Reboot the device.
The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_VXC.
See Also: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
142
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Enabler Configuration
The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking:
Avalanche Icon
either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar
or
selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu.
The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a
navigation menu.
Figure 3-40 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen
Some parameters and features described in this section may not be available if you are not running
the latest version of the Enabler. Please contact your LXE representative for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
File
View
Help
Connect
Abort
Settings
Scan Config
Exit
Updates
Programs
Icons
List
Details
Launchable
All Packages
Time on Taskbar
Device Status
Adapter Info
About
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
143
File Menu Options
Connect
The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual
connection to the Mobile Device Server. The connection methods, by default,
are wireless and COM connections. Any updates available will be applied to
the mobile device immediately upon a successful connection.
Abort
Stop transmission.
Settings
The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control
panel to locally configure the Enabler settings. The Enabler control panel is,
by default, password protected. The default password is system. The
password is not case-sensitive.
Scan Config
Note: LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE
devices.
The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure
Enabler settings using a special barcode that can be created using the
Avalanche Mobility Center Console utilities. Refer to the Wavelink
Avalanche Mobility Center User’s Guide for details.
Exit
The Exit option is password protected. The default password is leave. The
password is not case-sensitive.
If changes were made on the Startup/Shutdown tab screen, then after entering
the password, tap OK and the following screen is displayed:
Change the option if desired. Tap the X button to cancel Exit. Tap the OK
button to exit the Avalanche applet.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
144
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Avalanche Update Settings
Access:
Start | Avalanche | File | Settings
Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the mobile device. LXE recommends
changing and then saving the changes (reboot) before connecting to the network.
Alternatively, the Mobile Device Server on the Wavelink Avalanche Management Console can be
disabled until needed (refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User’s Guide for details).
Menu Options
Settings Tab
Function
Connection
Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server portion
of the Avalanche Management Console. Set the order in which serial
ports or RF are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device
Server.
Execution
Unavailable in this release. LXE recommends using AppLock, which is
resident on each Windows mobile device.
Server Contact
Setup synchronization, scheduled Mobile Device Server contact, suspend
and reboot settings.
Startup/Shutdown
Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown.
Scan Config
This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special
barcode that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. Not
currently supported by LXE.
Display
Set up the Windows display at startup, on connect and during normal
mode. The settings can be adjusted by the user.
Shortcuts
Add, delete and update shortcuts to user-allowable applications.
Adapters
Enable or disable network and wireless settings. Select an adapter and
switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings.
Status
View the current adapter signal strength and quality, IP address, MAC
address, SSID, BSSID and Link speed. The user cannot edit this
information.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
145
Connection
Figure 3-41 Connection Options
Avalanche Server
Address
Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to
the mobile device
Check Serial
Connection
Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection
to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to
the Mobile Device Server.
Disable
ActiveSync
Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server.
Restrict Adapter
Link Speed
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
146
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Execution
Note the dimmed options on this panel. This menu option is designed to manage downloaded
applications for automatic execution upon startup.
Figure 3-42 Execution Options (Dimmed)
Auto-Execute Selection
An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Mobility
Center Console can be run automatically following each boot.
Select Auto-Execute App
The drop-down box provides a list of applications that have been
installed by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console.
Delay before execution
Time delay before launching Auto-Execute application.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
147
Server Contact
Figure 3-43 Server Contact Options
Sync Clock
Reset the time on the mobile computer based on the time on
the Mobile Device Server.
Contact
On Startup – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the
Enabler is accessed.
On Resume – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when
resuming from Suspend mode.
On Ext. Power – Initiate connection to the Mobile Device
Server when the device is connected to an external power
source, such as based on a docking event.
Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact
the Mobile Device Server and query for updates at a regular
interval beginning at a specific time.
Wakeup device if suspended
If the time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile
Device Server occurs, a mobile device that is in Suspend
Mode can ‘wakeup’ and process updates.
Reboot before attempt
Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile
Device Server.
Require external power
Only connect when the device has external power.
Use relative offset
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
148
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Startup/Shutdown
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock to manage the taskbar. AppLock is resident on each
mobile device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6.
Figure 3-44 Startup / Shutdown Options
Do not monitor or launch Enabler
When the device boots, do not launch the Enabler
application and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile
Device Server.
Monitor for updates
Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and
process any updates that are available. Do not launch
the Enabler application.
Monitor and launch Enabler
Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and
process any updates that are available. Launch the
Enabler application.
Manage Taskbar (Lock or Hide)
Note the dimmed options. The Enabler can restrict user
access to other applications when the user interface is
accessed by either locking or hiding the taskbar.
Program Shutdown (Continue or
Stop monitoring)
The system administrator can control whether the
Enabler continues to monitor the Mobile Device Server
for updates once the Enabler application is exited.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
149
Scan Config
Note:
Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche System but is
not currently supported by LXE on Windows CE.
Figure 3-45 Scan Config Option
Display
Figure 3-46 Window Display Options
Update Window Display
The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of
the connection with the Mobile Device Server.
At startup
Half screen, Hidden or Full screen. Default is Half screen.
On connect
As is, Half screen, full screen, Locked full screen. Default is As is.
Normal
Half screen, Hidden or As is. Default is As is.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
150
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Shortcuts
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile
device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6.
Figure 3-47 Application Shortcuts
Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device. Shortcuts are viewed and activated
in the Programs panel. This limits the user’s access to certain applications when the Enabler is
controlling the mobile device display.
LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. See Chapter 6 “AppLock” for
instruction.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
151
Adapters
Note:
LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the
default values in Chapter 5 before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet.
Figure 3-48 Adapter Options – Network
Manage Network
Setting
When enabled, the Enabler will control the network settings. This
parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center
Console and is enabled by default.
Manage Wireless
Settings
When enabled, the Enabler will control the wireless settings. This
parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center
Console and is disabled by default. This parameter setting does not
apply to Summit Clients only.
Current Adapter
Lists all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device.
Primary Adapter
Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter
(active only if there are multiple network adapters).
Icon on taskbar
Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may,
optionally, override the standard Windows taskbar.
Use Avalanche Network
Profile
The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the
Avalanche Mobility Center Console.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
152
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
Avalanche Icon
Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network
Profile tab which will display current network settings.
Figure 3-49 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed
Use Manual Settings
When enabled, the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless
settings coming from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and
use only the network settings on the mobile device.
Properties Icon
Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings
Properties dialog applet. From here, the user can configure
Network, DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown
below:
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
153
Network
DNS
Wireless
Figure 3-50 Manual Settings Properties Panels
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
154
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration
For descriptions of these Enabler parameters, refer to Chapter 5 “Wireless Network
Configuration”.
LXE does not recommend enabling “Manage Wireless Settings” for Summit Client devices.
When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings, the
Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global
Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters
panel (see Figure titled Adapters Options – Network).
Until these options are enabled, the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third-party
software associated with these settings.
Status
The Status panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the
drop down box. Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button. When tapped, the
signal strength, signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter. It
also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the dropdown menu.
Figure 3-51 Status Display
Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile
device. Speed is dependent on signal strength.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
eXpress Scan
155
eXpress Scan
eXpress Scan may be used for the initial network configuration of the mobile device. Available
configuration parameters can include wireless network settings and the Avalanche Mobile Device
Server Address.
Barcodes are created with the eXpress Config utility. Please refer to Using Wavelink Avalanche
on LXE Windows Computers, available on the LXE manuals CD, for information on eXPress
Config. Depending on the barcode length and the number of parameters selected, eXpress Config
generates one or more barcodes for device configuration.
To use eXpress Scan to configure an LXE device:
1.
Start eXpress Scan on the LXE device by double clicking the eXpress Scan icon on the
desktop.
Figure 3-52 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon
2.
Enter the barcode password used when the barcode was created, if any.
Figure 3-53 eXpress Scan Password Input
Click Start.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
156
eXpress Scan
3.
Barcode 1 must be scanned first. The scanned data is displayed in the “Data” text box. The
password, if any, entered above is compared to the password entered when the barcodes were
created.
Figure 3-54 Scan Barcode 1
4.
If the passwords match, the barcode data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect the
number of barcodes included in the set.
Figure 3-55 Scan Remaining Barcodes
The remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order. After a barcode is scanned, that
barcode is removed from the “Remaining:” list and placed in the “Scanned:” list.
5.
If the passwords do not match, an error message is displayed. The current screen can be
closed using the X in the upper right corner. The password can be re-entered and Barcode 1
scanned again.
6.
Once the first barcode is scanned, the remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
eXpress Scan
157
7.
After the last barcode is scanned, the settings are automatically applied.
Figure 2-56 Configuring Settings
8.
Once configured, the device is warmbooted and the new settings are active.
9.
If Wavelink Avalanche is deployed and the appropriate network settings are configured, the
device connects to the Mobile Device Server and any software updates and additional
configuration data are downloaded.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
158
VX6 Reference Guide
eXpress Scan
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 4 Scanner
Introduction
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters, enable or disable symbologies from being scanned,
scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop
bits and data bits for available COM ports.
Barcode Processing Overview
Note:
Steps 1-6 describe the barcode manipulation. Steps 7-11 describe how the manipulated
data is built. Step 12 describes how the manipulated data is output.
The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows:
1
Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID and matching length (Min/Max). If it matches, it
is processed per the rules in place for that symbology. If the scan does not meet the
criteria for that symbology, it will be processed based on the settings for All. If a code ID
is not found, the barcode data will be processed based on the settings for All.
2 If symbology is disabled, the scan is rejected.
3 Strip leading data bytes unconditionally.
4 Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally.
5 Parse for, and strip if found, Barcode Data strings.
6 Replace any control characters with string, as configured.
7 Add prefix string to output buffer.
8 If Code ID is *not* stripped, add saved code ID from above to output buffer.
9 Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer.
10 Add suffix string to output buffer.
11 Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer, in case the data is processed as a string.
12 If key output is enabled, start the process to output keys. If control characters are
encountered:
• If Translate All is set, key is translated to CTRL + char, and output.
• If Translate All is not set, and key has a valid VK code, key is output.
• Otherwise, key is ignored (not output).
The data is ready to be read by applications.
See “Barcode Processing Examples” at the end of the “Barcode Manipulation” section.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
160
Barcode Manipulation
Barcode Manipulation
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
If your scanner applet has an “Advanced” tab instead of a “Barcode” tab, please see section titled
“Advanced” at the end of this chapter.
Factory Default Settings
Main
Port 1
Port 2
Power Port 1 while asleep
Enable Internal Scanner Sound
Send Key Messages (WEDGE)
COM Ports (COM1 – COM3 3)
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Power on Pin 9 (+5v)
Barcode
Enable Code ID
Symbology Settings
AIM (ID)
Symbol (ID)
Custom
Control Character
Translate All
Character/Replacement
Custom Identifiers
Name
ID Code
Disabled
COM1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
9600
None
1
8
Enabled (COM1) Disabled (COM3)
None
Enable Dimmed / Min – 1 to Max – all
Enable Dimmed
Enable Dimmed
Null
Disabled
Disabled
NULl / Ignore(drop)
Blank
Blank
Notes:
3
•
ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is assigned to Port 1 or
Port 2 in the Scanner applet as a scanner input. For example, if COM3 is being used
by the scanner, COM3 can’t be used by any other program.
•
After scanning a Reset All or equivalent barcode for your specific external scanner,
the next step is to select Start | Control Panel | Scanner. Click the OK button and
close the scanner control panel. This action synchronizes all scanner formats.
•
The scanner wedge does not configure an external scanner. Supported symbologies
must be enabled for external scanner (see the documentation provided with the
external scanner). Enabling or disabling a symbology in the scanner wedge only
affects processing of the barcode data. It does not enable or disable the external
scanner’s ability to scan the symbology.
•
LXE 8300 Tethered Scanners and Symbology Settings (AIM ID) – Before
manipulating data received from an 8300 series scanner, and symbology settings are
desired, the user must configure and append the Symbology ID as a prefix. See the
documentation provided with the scanner for details.
COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
161
Main Tab
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main
Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main Tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
When Power Port 1 while asleep is checked, whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will
remain powered while the device is in Suspend. This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device
by pressing the trigger on the scanner.
When Send Key Messages (WEDGE) is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and
sent to the active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of
LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is
significantly faster than using “Wedge”. Even if Send Key Messages is enabled (“key mode”), the
data is still available using the scanner APIs (“block mode”). When using the scanner APIs, refer
to the “CE API Programming Guide” and the ClearBuf setting. When two applications are reading
the data using block mode, ClearBuf must be off so that the data is not erased when read.
Note:
The user can also open the WDG: device and perform standard OS read functions to
retrieve the data without using the LXE APIs.
When Enable Internal Scanner Sound is checked, it does not affect any beeps emitted by a
Bluetooth or tethered scanner. In some cases, the scan of data by the external scanner triggers a
good scan beep from the scanner, and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing
routine causes a bad scan beep from the VX6 on the same data.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
162
Barcode Manipulation
COM Port Tabs
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 or COM3
Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labeled ports:
COM1 and COM3 Panel Options are Identical.
Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
The COM 1 tab contains the same parameters as the COM 3 Tab. Adjust the settings and tap the
OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
163
Barcode Tab
Access:
Note:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode
The Barcode tab replaces the Advanced tab used in previous software revisions and
adds several new features. Please contact your LXE support representative for details.
The Scanner application (Wedge) can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside
the Wedge software.
The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned.
Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration
barcode in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide (available on the LXE Manuals CD and
the LXE ServicePass website).
Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop-down box: None, AIM ID, Symbol ID, or Custom
ID.
Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Barcode tab
Buttons
Symbology
Settings
Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned, set the minimum
and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the
beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a
prefix or suffix to a barcode before transmission.
Ctrl Char
Mapping
Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters (values
less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes.
Custom
Identifiers
Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a
Code ID. After a Custom Identifier is defined, Symbology Settings can be
defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs.
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
164
Barcode Manipulation
Enable Code ID
This parameter determines the type of barcode identifier being processed.
Note:
Since the VX6 does not contain an internal scanner, this feature requires that the
external scanner be manually configured to include the Code ID as part of the incoming
barcode data. Please refer to the scanner documentation to enable the Code ID.
Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies, not for an
individual symbology. Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate
between symbologies.
Options
None
The only entry in the Symbology list is All. The barcode data is received but it
is not checked for a Code ID.
AIM
The Symbology list is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that
platform, plus any configured Custom code IDs.
Symbol
The Symbology list is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that
platform, plus any configured Custom Code IDs.
Custom
Does not change the scanner’s Code ID transmission setting. The Symbology
list is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs.
Notes
• When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is not enabled, the code ID is sent as part of
the barcode data to an application.
• When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is enabled, the entire custom code ID string is
stripped (i.e. treated as a Code ID).
• UPC/EAN Codes only: The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped.
• When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol, Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the
list of standard Code IDs.
• When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code
IDs.
• When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the
end of the Custom Code ID. For example, if a Custom Code ID ‘AAA’ is created to be
read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 ‘]A1’, the Custom Code ID must be
entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID : ]A1AAA.
• When Enable Code ID is set to None, Custom Code IDs are ignored.
• Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog. They are
processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver. This allows custom IDs, based
on actual code IDs, to be processed before the Code ID.
• The tethered scanner operation cannot be controlled by the VX6 scanner application;
therefore, a ‘good’ beep may be sounded from the tethered scanner even if a barcode from
a tethered scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified. The VX6 emits a bad
scan beep, to indicate the barcode has been rejected.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
165
Barcode – Symbology Settings
The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is
being configured. The features available on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to
individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning, set the minimum and maximum size
barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on
configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode.
The Symbology drop-down list contains all symbologies supported on the VX6. An asterisk
appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the
default value.
Each time a Symbology is changed, the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped.
Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop-down list.
Figure 4-4 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings
Clear
This button will erase any programmed overrides, returning to the default settings for the
selected symbology. If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology, a
confirmation dialog appears, then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults, and
all star (*) indications are removed from the list of Symbologies.
The order in which these settings are processed are:
• Code ID
• Leading / Trailing
• Barcode Data
Note:
When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in the
Symbology field, Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the
user is not allowed to change them, to prevent deactivating the scanner completely.
When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed, the settings in this
dialog become the defaults, used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies.
This is also true for Custom IDs, where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user.
Note:
In Custom mode on the Barcode tab, any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be
stripped, because they will not be recognized as code IDs.
If a specific symbology’s settings have been configured, a star (*) will appear next to it in the
Symbology drop-down box, so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their
defaults. If a particular symbology has been configured, the entire set of parameters from that
symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology. In other words, either the settings for the
configured symbology will be used, or the default settings are used, not a combination of the two.
If a symbology has not been configured (does not have an * next to it) the settings for “All” are
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
166
Barcode Manipulation
used which are not necessarily the defaults.
Parameters
Enable
This checkbox enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the symbology field.
The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the type of ID
specified in the Barcode tab – Enable Code ID field (AIM or Symbol) plus any
custom identifiers.
When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode
data, if the symbology is disabled, the barcode is rejected. Otherwise, the other
settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed. If the symbology is
disabled, all other fields on this dialog are grayed.
When there are no customized settings, and the Enable checkbox is unchecked (All
is selected and no other settings are customized) a confirmation dialog is presented
to the user “You are about to disable all scan input – Is this what you want to do?”.
Tap the Yes button or the No button. Tap the X button to close the dialog without
making a decision.
If there are customized settings, uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All
symbology. This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones.
Min
This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data (not including Code
ID) must meet to be processed. Any barcode scanned that is less than the number
of characters specified in the Min field is rejected. The default for this field is 1.
Max
This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data (not including Code
ID) can be to be processed. Any barcode scanned that has more characters than
specified in the Max field is rejected. The default for this field is All. If the value
entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology, the
maximum valid length will be used instead.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
167
Strip Leading/Trailing Control
This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is
buffered for the application. If all values are set, Code ID takes precedence over Leading and
Trailing; Barcode Data stripping is performed last. Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix
are added, so does not affect them.
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
Figure 4-5 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls
If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data, it
becomes a zero byte data string. If, in addition, Strip Code ID is enabled, and no prefix or suffix is
configured, the processing will return a zero-byte data packet, which will be rejected.
The operation of each type of stripping is defined below:
Leading
This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode
data (not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is
disabled by default.
Trailing
This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data
(not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by
default.
Code ID
Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field
in the Barcode tab. Programmed custom identifiers are always checked (in the
order they are entered) and stripped, regardless of Enable Code ID setting. By
default, Code ID stripping is enabled for all symbologies (meaning code IDs will
be stripped, unless specifically configured otherwise).
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
168
Barcode Manipulation
Barcode Data Match List
Barcode
Data
This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the
barcode. Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add
button. The entry is added to the Match list.
To remove an entry from the Match list, highlight the entry in the list and tap
the Remove button.
Tap the OK button to store any additions, deletions or changes.
Figure 4-6 Barcode Data Match List
Barcode Data Edit Buttons
Add
Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button. Tap the Add
button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list.
Insert
Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert.
Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The
data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list.
Edit
Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for
editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the
values for the current item in the list are updated.
Clear All
When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button
clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in
the Name and ID Code text boxes.
Remove
The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom
IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to
delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields
are cleared at the same time.
Notes
• Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete, and is not affected
by any stripping settings.
• If the stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode, a ‘good’ beep will still be
sounded, since barcode data was read from the scanner.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
169
Match List Rules
The data in the list is processed by the rules listed below:
• Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list. If the list contains
ABC and AB, in that order, incoming data with ABC will match first, and the AB will have
no effect.
• When a match between the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is
found, that string is stripped from the barcode data.
• Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached.
• If the wildcard * is not specified, the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the
barcode data. The string ABC* strips off the prefix ABC. The string *XYZ will strip off
the suffix XYZ. The string ABC*XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together. More than
one * in a configuration string is not allowed. (The user interface will not prevent it, but
results would not be as expected, as only the first * is used in parsing to match the string.)
• The question mark wildcard ? may be used to match any single character in the incoming
data. For example, the data AB?D will match ABCD, ABcD, or AB0D, but not ABDE. It
is valid to have more than one ? in a string to match multiple characters.
• The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured. The Symbology selected in the
Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured.
• Note that the Code ID (if any are configured) is ignored by this dialog, regardless of the
setting of Strip: Code ID in the Symbologies dialog. If Strip Code ID is disabled, then the
barcode data to match must include the Code ID. If Strip Code ID is enabled, the data
should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
170
Barcode Manipulation
Add Prefix/Suffix Control
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
Figure 4-7 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls
Use this option to specify a string of text, hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the
beginning (prefix) or the end (suffix) of the barcode data. Up to 19 characters can be included in
the string. The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex
equivalent or entering in hat encoding. Please see the “Hat Encoding” section in Appendix B for a
list of characters with their hex and hat-encoded values.
Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values.
Add Prefix
To enable a prefix, check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the
textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When
barcode data is processed, the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before
any other data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping
settings do not affect the prefix. The prefix is added to the output buffer for the
Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the prefix is
added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured.
Add Suffix
To enable a suffix, check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the
textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When
barcode data is processed, the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the
barcode data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping
settings do not affect the suffix. The suffix is added to the output buffer for the
Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the suffix is
added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured.
See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” in Appendix B “Technical
Specifications”.
Note:
VX6 Reference Guide
Non-ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option. NonASCII equivalent keys include the function keys (e.g. <F1>), arrow keys, Page up, Page
down, Home, and End.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
171
Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping
See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter.
The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge
performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Control characters
can be replaced with user-defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values. In
key message mode, control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key
sequences.
Figure 4-8 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping
See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical
Specifications”.
Translate All
When Translate All is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned
barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in
Character mode.
The wedge provides a one-to-one mapping of control characters to their equivalent
control+character sequence of keystrokes. If control characters are translated, the translation is
performed on the barcode data, prefix, and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated.
Translate All
This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode (on the Main tab)
selected. In Key Message mode, when this option is enabled, control
characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent
‘control’ key keystroke sequence (13 [0x0d] is translated to Control+M
keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL, SHIFT, and m keys on the
keypad). Additionally, when Translate All is disabled, any control code which
has a keystroke equivalent (enter, tab, escape, backspace, etc.) is output as a
keystroke. Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped.
Character
This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name. Refer
to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their
names. When a character name is selected from the drop down box, the default
text Ignore (drop) is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control.
Ignore (drop) is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control
character is not being ignored. Once the user types any character into the
Replacement edit control, reselecting the character from the Character drop
down box redisplays the default Ignore (drop) in the Replacement edit control.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
172
Barcode Manipulation
Replacement
The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the
replacement of the control character. Replacements for a control character are
assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down
box, typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control (according to the
formats defined above) and then selecting Assign. The assigned replacement is
then added to the list box above the Assign button.
For example, if ‘Carriage Return’ is replaced by Line Feed (by specifying ‘^J’
or ‘0x0A’) in the configuration, the value 0x0d received in any scanned
barcode (or defined in the prefix or suffix) will be replaced with the value
0x0a.
The Wedge then sends Ctrl+J to the receiving application, rather than Ctrl+M.
List Box
The list box shows all user-defined control characters and their assigned
replacements. All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white
space that has been assigned.
Delete
This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted. When an
entry (or entries) is highlighted, and Delete is selected, the highlighted
material is deleted from the list box.
Barcode – Custom Identifiers
Code IDs can be defined by the user. This allows processing parameters to be configured for
barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data
embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID.
These are called “custom” Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the
Symbology dialog, unless Enable Code ID is set to None. When the custom Code ID is found in
a barcode, the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data. The
dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured.
It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs (if Enable
Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol), or to replace the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID
is set to Custom).
When Enable Code ID is set to None, custom code IDs are ignored.
Note:
Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog, and are
processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself. This allows custom IDs
based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself.
Note:
When Strip: Code ID is enabled, the entire custom Code ID string is stripped (i.e.,
treated as a Code ID).
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
173
Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers
After adding, changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list, tap the OK button to save
changes and return to the Barcode panel.
Parameters
Name text box
Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID. Names
must be unique from each other; however, the Name and ID Code may have
the same value. Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify
the custom Code ID in a user-friendly manner. Both Name and ID Code must
be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list.
ID Code text box ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an
identifier (the actual Code ID). Both Name and ID Code must be specified in
order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list.
Buttons
Add
Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button.
Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the
Custon ID list.
Insert
Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert.
Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The
data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list.
Edit
Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for
editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the
values for the current item in the list are updated.
Clear All
When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button
clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in
the Name and ID Code text boxes.
Remove
The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom
IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to
delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields
are cleared at the same time.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
174
Barcode Manipulation
Control Code Replacement Examples
Configuration
data
Ignore(drop)
Printable text
Hat-encoded text
Escaped hatencoded text
Hex-encoded text
Escaped hexencoded text
VX6 Reference Guide
Translation
The control
character is
discarded from
the barcode data,
prefix and suffix
Text is
substituted for
Control
Character.
The hat-encoded
text is translated
to the equivalent
hex value.
The hatencoding to pass
thru to the
application.
The hexencoded text is
translated to the
equivalent hex
value.
The hexencoding to pass
thru to the
application.
Example
Control
Character
ESCape
‘Ignore (drop)’
0x1B in the
barcode is
discarded.
Start of TeXt
‘STX’
Carriage
Return
‘^M’
Horizontal
Tab
‘\^I’
Carriage
Return
‘0x0A’
0x02 in a
barcode is
converted to
the text ‘STX’.
Value 0x0d in
a barcode is
converted to
the value
0x0d.
Value 0x09 in
a barcode is
converted to
the text ‘^I’.
Value 0x0D in
a barcode is
converted to a
value 0x0A.
Vertical Tab
‘\0x0A’ or
‘0\x0A’
Example
configuration
Translated
data
Value 0x0C is
a barcode is
converted to
text ‘0x0A’
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Barcode Manipulation
175
Barcode Processing Examples
The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix/suffix configurations. The examples
assume that the scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier.
Symbology
All
EAN-128
(]C1)
EAN-13
(]E0)
Intrlv 2 of 5
(]IO)
Code93
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Min length
1
4
1
1
Max length
all
all
all
10
Strip Code ID
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Strip Leading
3
0
3
3
‘*123’
‘1*’
‘456’
0
0
3
3
Prefix
‘aaa’
‘bbb’
‘ccc’
‘ddd’
Suffix
‘www’
‘xxx’
‘yyy’
‘zzz’
Enable
Strip Barcode Data
Strip Trailing
Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table, below are examples of scanned
barcode data and results of these manipulations.
Barcode Symbology
Raw Scanner Data
Resulting Data
EAN-128
]C11234567890123
bbb1234567890xxx
EAN-128
]C111234567890123
bbb11234567890xxx
EAN-128
]C1123
EAN-13
]E01234567890987
ccc]E04567890yyy
EAN-13
]E01231234567890987
ccc]E0234567890yyy
EAN-13
]E01234
ccc]E0yyy
I2/5
]I04444567890987654321
I2/5
]I04444567890123
ddd7890zzz
I2/5
]I0444
dddzzz
I2/5
]I022245622
ddd45zzz
Code-93
]G0123456
< rejected > (disabled)
Code-93
]G0444444
< rejected > (disabled)
Code-39
]A01234567890
aaa4567890www
Code-39 full ASCII
]A41231234567890
aaa1234567890www
Code-39
]A4
< rejected > (too short)
< rejected > (too long)
< rejected > (too short)
Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner
triggers a good scan beep (from the external scanner), and then the rejection of scanned barcode
data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
176
Length Based Barcode Stripping
Length Based Barcode Stripping
Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two barcodes with the same symbology but with
different discrete lengths. This procedure is not applicable for barcodes with variable lengths
(falling between a maximum value and a minimum value).
Example 1:
• A normal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired barcode ID.
• Next, a custom barcode symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original
AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings.
Example 2:
For the purposes of this example, the following sample barcode parameters will be used –
EAN128 and Code128 barcodes. Some of the barcodes start with ‘00’ and some start with ‘01’.
The barcodes are different lengths.
• 34 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 18)
• 26 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 10)
• 24 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 8). This 24
character barcode is CODE128.
• 20 character length with first two characters = “00” (strip first 0 (no characters) and last 4)
On the Barcode tab, set Enable Code ID to AIM.
Create four custom IDs, using 1 for EAN128 barcode and 0 for Code128 barcode.
•
•
•
•
c1 = Code = ‘]C1’
c2 = Code = ‘]C1’
c3 = Code = ‘]C0’ (24 character barcode is CODE128)
c4 = Code = ‘]C1’
Figure 4-10 AIM Custom IDs
AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner:
• c1 min length = 34, max length = 34, strip leading 2, strip trailing 18, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “01”
• c2 min length = 26, max length = 26, strip leading 2, strip trailing 10, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “01”
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Length Based Barcode Stripping
177
• c3 min length = 24, max length = 24, strip leading 2, strip trailing 8, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “01”
• c4 min length = 20, max length = 20, strip leading 0, strip trailing 4, Code ID enabled,
Barcode Data = “00”
Add the AIM custom symbologies. Refer to the previous section Barcode – Symbology Settings
for instruction.
Figure 4-11 AIM Custom Setup for C1
Click the Barcode Data button. Click the Add button.
Add the data for the match codes.
Figure 4-12 Barcode Match Data for C1
Refer to the previous section BarcodeData Match List for instruction.
Scan a barcode and examine the result.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
178
Screen Blanking
Screen Blanking
The VX6 can be configured to blank the display when the vehicle to which it is mounted is
moving, eliminating a possible distraction for the driver. When configured properly, the screen
blanking feature provides a tamper resistant method to blank the vehicle screen. The screen
blanking feature consists of Scanner Control Panel Options and a customer supplied cable
connected to one of the COM ports on the VX6. Properly configured, the display is visible only
when the cable provides a signal that the vehicle has stopped.
The customer must supply their own cable. The cable specifications are detail in “Technical
Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in Chapter 2, Physical Description and Layout”.
The cable can be hooked to either the COM1 or COM3 port. The COM port used must be
selected in the Scanner control panel.
Screen blanking is configured on the Main tab of the Scanner control panel.
Figure 4-13 Enable Screen Blanking
S
Warning
!
If the COM1/COM3 screen blanking and On Delay choices are not shown, the
system load must be updated.
Do not select COM1 ScrCtl or COM3 ScrCtl unless you have already attached
the cable described in “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in
Chapter 2, Physical Description and Layout”.
Failure to attach the cable before selecting a screen blanking option will cause
the screen to go blank (and remain blank) until an appropriate cable is attached
to the specified COM port.
Set the desired COM port (COM1 ScrCtl or COM3 ScrCtl) and On Delay. Press OK. The On
Delay can be used to specify the time (in milliseconds) before the display turns on. For example,
use the On Delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicle’s accelerator pedal.
Release of the accelerator may mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary.
Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop.
To disable screen blanking, select COM1 or COM3 to return the selected COM port to normal
operation.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Screen Blanking
179
Operation
To prevent a general user from disabling the screen blanking feature, at least one of the two
following actions must be taken:
•
Password protection can be set via the Password icon in the Windows Control Panel.
Without this password, general users are unable to access the Control Panel to
disable the screen blanking feature. For more information on the Password feature,
please refer “Password”, earlier in this chapter.
•
AppLock can be used to restrict the general user’s access to only certain programs.
Since the user under AppLock cannot access the Control Panel, the user cannot
disable the screen blanking feature. For more information on AppLock, please refer
to Chapter 6, “AppLock”.
Operation of the VX6 is unchanged except for the blank display. The keypad and touchscreen are
still enabled, however any input from they keypad, touchscreen or other device DOES NOT wake
up the display.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
180
VX6 Reference Guide
Screen Blanking
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration
Introduction
The VX6 computer may have a Summit, Cisco or Symbol radio. The Summit radio is either an
802.11b/g radio or an 802.11a/b/g radio. The Cisco and Symbol radios are 802.11b radios. The
radio can be configured for no encryption, WEP encryption or WPA security (N/A with Symbol
radio).
Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authentications. Please refer to the “Certificates”
section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates.
Please refer to the table below for the security options supported for each radio type.
Security Options
Supported
Radio Type
Summit
802.11b/g
Summit
802.11a/b/g
Cisco
Symbol
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
WEP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LEAP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
WPA-PSK
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
WPA/LEAP
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
PEAP-MSCHAP
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
PEAP-GTC
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
EAP-TLS
Yes
Yes
No
No
EAP-FAST
Yes
Yes
No
No
Radio Availability
The Summit 802.11a/b/g radio is available only with Windows CE 5.0.
The Summit 802.11b/g radio is available with Windows CE .NET or CE 5.0.
The Cisco radio is available only with Windows CE .NET.
The Symbol radio is available only with Windows CE .NET.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The Cisco and Summit radios are obsolete. Information on these radios is provided as a
courtesy to LXE’s customer.
VX6 Reference Guide
182
Summit Radio
Summit Radio
The Summit radio requires software revision 2BT or greater. All VX6’s with a
Summit radio ship with this software revision or greater. To identify the software
revision, please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel.
S
Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and
Access Point for VX6 communication.
It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication
will fail.
It may be necessary to upgrade radio drivers to in order to use certain Summit
Client Utility (SCU) features described in this chapter. Please contact your LXE
representative for details.
!
There are two Summit radios offered in the VX6:
•
an 802.11g radio, capable of both 802.11b and 802.11g data rates.
•
an 802.11a radio, capable of 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g data rates
These radios support no encryption, WEP, LEAP or WPA (PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC,
WPA/LEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-FAST and WPA-PSK).
!
VX6 Reference Guide
When using the 802.11a radio, the U-NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor
operation. For regulatory domains in which the U-NII 3 band is allowed, the
following channels are supported: 149, 157 and 161. The AP must be configured
accordingly.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
183
Summit Client Utility
Note:
When making changes to profile or global parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted
afterwards.
Access:
Start | Programs | Summit | SCU or
Summit Icon on Desktop or
Summit Tray Icon (if present) or
Wi-Fi icon in the Windows CE Control Panel (if present)
Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility
The Main tab provides information, admin login and active profile selection.
Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab. The parameters on this tab can be set to
unique values for each profile. This tab was labeled Config in early versions of the SCU.
The Status tab contains information on the current connection.
The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio.
Global parameters are found on the Global tab. The values for these parameters apply to all
profiles. This tab was labeled Global Settings in early versions of the SCU.
Help
Help is available by clicking the ? icon in the title bar on most SCU screens.
The SCU help may also be accessed by selecting Start | Help and tapping the Summit Client
Utility link. The SCU does not have to be accessed to view the help information using this
option.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
184
Summit Radio
Summit Tray Icon
The Summit tray icon
provides access to the SCU and a visual indicator of radio status.
The Summit tray icon is displayed when:
•
The Summit radio is installed and active
•
The Windows Zero Config utility is not active
•
The Tray Icon setting is On
Click the icon to launch the SCU.
Use the tray icon to view the radio status:
The radio is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access
Point
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access
Point is -80 dBm or weaker
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access
Point is stronger than -80dBm but not stronger than -60 dBm
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access
Point is stronger than -60 dBm but not stronger than -40 dBm
The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access
Point is stronger than -40 dBm
Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio
•
The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with
a red X through them, indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled
but the connection is inactive at this time (the VX6 is not connected to a network).
•
You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client
Utility to connect to your network. LXE recommends using the Summit Client
Utility to connect to your network. The Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot
control the complete set of security features of the radio.
Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down list as the active profile. Warmboot
the VX6. The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC
Wireless Information control panel. Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels, setup
radio and security settings.
To switch back to the SCU, select any other profile in the SCU Active Config drop down list,
except ThirdPartyConfig. Warmboot the VX6. Radio control is passed to the SCU.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
185
Main Tab
Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab
The Main tab displays information about the radio including:
•
Active Profile – Select from the profiles created using the Config tab.
•
Status of the radio (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc).
•
Radio Type (BG is 802.11b/g radio, ABG is 802.11a/b/g radio)
•
Auto Profile option
•
Regulatory Domain
•
Driver version
•
SCU (Summit Client Utility) version
•
Copyright Info may be accessed by clicking the About SCU button
The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the radio card. Once disabled, the button label
changes to Enable Radio. By default, the radio is enabled.
The Admin Login button provides access to editing radio parameters as well as adding, renaming
and deleting profiles. Profile and Global parameters may only be edited after entering the Admin
Login password. The Active Config may be changed without logging in. Once logged in, the
button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is also automatically logged out when the
SCU is exited.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
186
Summit Radio
Admin Login
To login to Admin mode, click the Admin login button.
Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry
Enter the Admin password and press OK. If the password is incorrect, an error message is
displayed. The default password is SUMMIT.
Note:
The password is case sensitive!
The Admin password can be changed on the Global tab.
The end user can:
•
Turn radio On/Off on the Main tab
•
Select active Profile on the Main tab
•
View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab
•
View the global parameter settings on the Global tab.
•
View the current connection details on the Status tab
•
View the radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab
•
Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab.
After Admin login, the use can also:
VX6 Reference Guide
•
Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab
•
Edit global parameters on the Global tab.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
187
Auto Profile
Auto Profile allows the user to configure a list of profiles that the SCU can search when a radio
connection is lost. After using the Profile tab to create any desired profiles, return to the Main
tab. To specify which profiles are to be included in Auto Profile, click the List button.
Figure 5-4 Select Profiles for Auto Profile
The Auto Profile selection screen displays all currently configured profiles. Click on the
checkbox for any profiles that are to be included in Auto Profile selection then click OK to save.
To enable Auto Profile, click the On button on the Main tab.
When Auto Profile is On, if the radio goes out of range from the currently selected profile, the
radio then begins to attempt to connect to the profiles listed under Auto Profile.
The search continues until:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
the SCU connects to and, if necessary, authenticates with, one of the specified
profiles or
•
until the Off button is clicked to turn off Auto Profile.
VX6 Reference Guide
188
Summit Radio
Profile Tab
Notes: If the Admin password is not entered, the user can view the Profile parameter settings
but cannot make any changes. The buttons on this tab are grayed out if the user is not
logged in.
The Profile tab was previously labeled Config.
Figure 5-5 SCU – Profile Tab
When logged in as an Admin (see the Main tab), use the Profile tab to manage profiles:
•
Rename – Gives the profile a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an
error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed.
•
Delete – Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted. In that
case, an error message is displayed and the profile is not deleted.
•
New – Creates a new profile with the default settings (see the list below) and
prompts for a name. The name must be unique. If not, an error message is displayed
and the profile is not created.
•
Scan – Scans for and displays a list of available APs. Can be used to create a profile
from the APs listed.
•
Commit – Ensures that the profile settings made on this screen are saved in the
profile.
When not logged in, the parameters can be viewed, but cannot be changed.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
189
Using the Scan Feature
Clicking the Scan button opens a pop up window displaying any APs found during the scan.
Figure 5-6 Scan
The scan displays information on the available APs:
•
SSID – Lists the SSID of the network
•
RSSI – Displays the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) of the AP.
•
Secure – Displays True if the data encryption is used by the AP, false is data
encryption is not used.
Notes: The APs can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headings.
If there is more than one AP with the same SSID, the listing displays the AP with the
strongest signal and least security.
If you are logged in as an administrator, you can use the Connect button to create a new profile.
The button is grayed out is an administrator is not logged in.
•
Highlight the desired network in the listing and click the Connect button.
•
The new profile is named based on the SSID of the selected AP. If a profile already
exists with that name, the new profile name contains an incremental number to avoid
duplicate names.
•
The SSID parameter is assigned the value of the SSID of the AP. Other profile
entries must be completed manually.
Click the Refresh button to update the display.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
190
Summit Radio
Parameters
IMPORTANT – Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the
changes are saved. Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is
not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from the Global tab if
there are unsaved changes. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit
to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile parameters.
Config
A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters, name of the Profile
Default:
Default
SSID
A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the WLAN to
which the radio connects
Default:
Blank
Client Name
A string of up to 16 characters – Name assigned to the radio and the device using the radio. The
client name may be passed to networking radio devices, e.g. Access Points.
Default:
Blank
Power Save
Power save mode.
Options:
CAM = Constantly Awake Mode, power save off
Maximum = Maximum power saving mode
Fast = Fast power saving mode
Default:
Fast
Tx Power
Desired transmit power.
Options:
Maximum = Max power for current regulatory domain
50, 30, 20, 10, 5 or 1 mW
Default:
Maximum
Bit Rate
Options:
Auto = Rate negotiated automatically with the AP
1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit
Default:
Auto
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
191
Radio Mode
Specify 802.11a, 802.11b and/or 802.11g rates when communicating with AP. The options
displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio (802.11b/g or 802.11a/b/g) installed in
the mobile device.
Options:
B rates only (1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps)
BG Rates Full (All B and G rates)
G rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps)
BG optimized or BG subset (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 24, 36 and 54 Mbps))
A rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps)
ABG Rates Full (All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred)
BGA Rates Full (All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred)
Ad Hoc
Default:
BG Rates Full (for 802.11b/g radio)
BGA Rates Full (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
Note:
For the802.11 b/g radio, some SCU versions may have the default set as BG Optimized
rather than BG Rates Full.
It is important this parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect. For
example, if this parameter is set to G rates only the LXE device may only connect to APs set for G
rates and not those set for B and G rates.
The options for this parameter should be set as follows:
Antenna Configuration
Radio Mode
A Main and BG Main
ABG Rates Full
BGA Rates Full
A Main and A Aux
A Rates Only
BG Main and BG Aux
B Rates Only
G Rates Only
BG Rates Full
BG Subset
A Main only
A Rates Only
BG Main only
B Rates Only
G Rates Only
BG Rates Full
BG Rates Subset
Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on
your VX6.
Infrastructure Mode vs. Ad Hoc Mode
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
When any of the options except Ad Hoc are selected, the radio is in Infrastructure
Mode, meaning the radio attempts to associate with an AP.
•
When Ad Hoc mode is selected, the radio attempts to connect to another client radio.
Both client radios must be in Ad Hoc mode and have the same SSID specified.
VX6 Reference Guide
192
Summit Radio
Auth Type
802.11 authentication type used when associating with AP
Options:
Open
Shared key
LEAP
Default:
Open
Note:
Set the Auth Type radio parameter is set to “Open” for all configurations unless using
LEAP (not WPA) and the AP is configured for network EAP only. In this case, set the
Auth Type radio parameter to “LEAP”.
EAP Type
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used for 802.1x authentication to AP
Options:
None
LEAP
EAP-FAST
PEAP-MSCHAP
PEAP-GTC
EAP-TLS
Default:
None
Note:
The EAP type chosen determines if the Credentials button is active. Available entries on
the Credentials pop up window vary by EAP type chosen.
Security
Type of encryption used to protect transmitted data. This parameter was labeled as Encryption in
some versions of the SCU.
Options:
None
Manual WEP
Auto WEP
WPA PSK
WPA TKIP
WPA2 PSK
WPA2 AES
CCKM TKIP
CKIP Manual
CKIP Auto
Default:
None
Note:
The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP/PSK Keys button is active.
Available entries on the pop up window vary by encryption type chosen.
IMPORTANT – The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security
type chosen. Please refer to “Summit Wireless Security”, later in this chapter, to
determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
193
Status Tab
Figure 5-7 SCU – Status Tab
This screen provides information on the radio:
•
The profile being used
•
The status of the radio card (down, associated, authenticated, etc.)
•
Client information including device name, IP address and MAC address.
•
Information about the Access Point (AP) maintaining the connection to the network
including AP name, IP address and MAC address.
•
Channel currently being used for wireless traffic
•
Bit rate in Mbit.
•
Current transmit power in mW
•
Beacon period – the time between AP beacons in kilomircoseconds. (one
kilomicrosecond = 1,024 microseconds)
•
DTIM interval – A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon
contains a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The DTIM tells power
saving devices a packet is waiting for them. For example, if DTIM = 3, then every
third beacon contains a DTIM.
•
Signal strength (RSSI) displayed in dBm and graphically
•
Signal quality, a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and
graphically.
There are no user entries on this screen.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
After completing radio configuration, it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the
radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as
indicated above.
VX6 Reference Guide
194
Summit Radio
Diags Tab
Figure 5-8 SCU – Diags Tab
The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues.
VX6 Reference Guide
•
(Re)connect – Use this button to apply (or reapply) the current profile and attempt
to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. All activity is logged in the
Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen.
•
Release/Renew – Obtain a new IP address through release and renew. All activity is
logged in the Diagnostic Output box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the
radio, this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. Note that the current IP
address is displayed above this button.
•
Start Ping – Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the
right of this button. Once the button is clicked, the ping begins and the button label
changes to Stop Ping. Clicking the button ends the ping. The ping also ends when
any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags
tab. The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box.
•
Diagnostics – Also attempts to (re)connect to the wireless LAN. However, this
option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the (Re)connect option.
This data dump includes radio state, profile settings, global settings, and a list of
broadcast SSID APs.
•
Save To… – Use this save the results of the diagnostics to a text file. Use the
explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file. The text
file can viewed using an application such as WordPad.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
195
Global Tab
Note:
The Global tab was previously labeled Global Settings.
The parameters on the global settings tab can be changed when an Admin is logged on. Without
the admin login, the current values for the parameters can be viewed, but they cannot be edited.
Figure 5-9 SCU – Global Tab
Parameters
IMPORTANT – Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the
changes are saved. Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is
not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from the Global tab if
there are unsaved changes. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit
to save those changes before making any additional changes to the global parameters.
Note:
Custom parameter options: Some parameters contain an option for custom.
The
parameter’s value is displayed as “Custom” when the operating system registry has
been used to set the parameter to a value not available from the Global settings
parameter options. Selecting Custom for a parameter has no effect as the parameter
value returns to the previously selected value when you press Commit.
Roam Trigger
If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the radio looks for a different AP with a stronger
signal.
Options:
-50, -55, -60, -65, -70, -75 dBm,
Custom (see Note above)
Default:
-65 dBm
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
196
Summit Radio
Roam Delta
Amount by which the new AP’s signal strength must exceed the current AP’s signal strength
before roaming is attempted.
Options:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 dBm,
Custom (see Note above)
Default:
10 dBm (for 802.11b/g radio)
5 dBm (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
Roam Period
The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam, that the radio collects
Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) scan data before a roaming decision is made.
Options:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 sec,
Custom (see Note above)
Default:
10 seconds (for 802.11b/g radio)
5 seconds (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
BG Channel Set
Defines the 2.4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming.
By specifying the channels to search roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels.
Options:
Full (all channels)
1, 6, 11 (the most commonly used channels)
1, 7, 13 (For ETSI and TELEC radios only)
Custom (see Note above)
Default:
Full
DFS Channels
Not currently supported.
Support for 5GHz 802.11a channels where support for DFS is required.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
Off
Aggressive Scan
When set to On and the current connection to an AP becomes weak, the radio scans for available
APs more aggressively. Aggressive scanning work with standard scanning (set through Roam
Trigger, Roam Delta and Roam Period). Aggressive scanning should b set to On unless there is
significant co-channel interference because of overlapping APs on the same channel.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
On
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
197
CCX Features
Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and AP specified maximum
transmit power features.
Options:
Full or On (Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features)
Optimized (Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features
except AP assisted roaming, AP specified max. transmit power and
radio management)
Off (Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version)
Default:
Off (for 802.11b/g radio)
Optimized (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
WMM
Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
Off
Auth Server
Specifies the type of authentication server.
Options:
Type 1 (ACS server)
Type 2 (non-ACS server)
Default:
Type 1
TX Diversity
How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to AP.
Options:
Main only = Main antenna only
Aux only = Aux antenna only
On = Use diversity
Default:
On (for 802.11b/g radio)
Main Only (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
The value for this parameter should be set as follows:
Antenna Configuration
TX Diversity
A Main and BG Main
Main Only
A Main and A Aux
On
BG Main and BG Aux
On
A Main only
Main Only
BG Main only
Main Only
Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on
your VX6.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
198
Summit Radio
RX Diversity
How to handle antennas diversity when receiving packets from AP.
Options:
Main Only = use main antenna only
Aux Only = use aux. antenna only
On-start on Main = On startup use main antenna
On-start on Aux = On startup use aux antenna
Default:
On-start on Main (for 802.11b/g radio)
Main only (for 802.11a/b/g radio)
The value for this parameter should be set as follows:
Antenna Configuration
RX Diversity
A Main and BG Main
Main Only
A Main and A Aux
On Start On Main
BG Main and BG Aux
On Start On Main
A Main only
Main Only
BG Main only
Main Only
Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on
your VX6.
Frag Thresh
If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold,
the packet is fragmented (sent as several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas
where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference.
Options:
256 to 2346
Default:
2346
RTS Thresh
If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send (RTS)
threshold, an RTS is sent before sending the packet. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in
areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point.
Options:
0 to 2347
Default:
2347
LED
The LED on the radio card is not visible to the user when the radio card is installed in a sealed
mobile device.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
Off
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
199
Tray Icon
Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the system tray.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
On
Hide Password
If On, the Summit Client Utility masks passwords as they are typed and when they are viewed.
Options:
On, Off
Default:
Depends on SCU revision
Admin Password
A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is
tapped. If Hide Password is On, the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry
text box. The password is Case Sensitive.
Default:
Note:
SUMMIT
Password is case sensitive.
Auth Timeout
Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to
succeed or fail.
If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out,
the association fails. No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed.
If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times
out, the user is again prompted to enter the credentials.
Options:
An integer from 3 to 60
Default:
8
Certs Path
A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where Root CA certificates for EAP authentication
(PEAP/MSCHAP, PEAP/GTC, EAP-TLS) and manual PACs for EAP-TLS are stored.
The Windows certificate store can also be used to store Root CA certificates. User certificates
(EAP-TLS) must be stored in the Windows certificate store.
LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists before assigning the path in this
parameter. For example, if the certificate is stored in My Computer/System/mycertificate.cer,
enter System in the Certs Path text box as the directory path.
Default:
System
Ping Payload
Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping.
Options:
32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024 bytes
Default:
32
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
200
Summit Radio
Ping Timeout ms
The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be continuously pinged. The Stop Ping
button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout.
Options:
0 to 30,000 ms
Default:
5000
Ping Delay ms
The amount of time, specified in milliseconds, between each ping.
Options:
0 to 30,000 ms
Default:
1000
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
201
Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials
When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit
Client Utility offers two choices:
•
The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this
method is selected, anyone using the device can access the network.
•
The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When the
device attempts to connect to the network, a sign on screen is displayed. The user
must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate.
How to: Use Stored Credentials
1.
After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button.
2.
Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button.
3.
Click the Commit button.
4.
For LEAP and WPA/LEAP, configuration is complete.
5.
For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows
certificate store.
6.
For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store.
7.
Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store
checkboxes are checked.
8.
The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the
Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to
select an individual certificate.
9.
For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen
by using the Browse button.
10. Click the OK button then the Commit button.
11. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property
configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used.
12. If changes are made to the stored credentials, click Commit to save those changes before
making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters.
Notes: More details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following
in this chapter.
If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials, the authentication will fail.
No error message is displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
202
Summit Radio
How to: Use Sign On Screen
1.
After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. Leave the
Username and Password blank. No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP
or WPA/LEAP.
2.
For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows
certificate store.
3.
For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store.
4.
Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store
checkboxes are checked.
5.
The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the
Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to
select an individual certificate.
6.
For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen
by using the Browse button.
7.
Click the OK button then the Commit button.
8.
When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed.
9.
Enter the Username and Password. Click the OK button.
Figure 5-10 Sign-On Screen
10. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property
configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used.
11. The sign-on screen is displayed after a reboot for each of the listed protocols.
Note:
Complete details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section
following in this chapter.
If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK, the device associates but does not
authenticate. The user is again prompted to enter credentials.
If the user clicks the Cancel button, the device does not associate. The user is not
prompted again for credentials until the device is rebooted, the radio is disabled then
enabled, the Reconnect button on the Diags tag is clicked or the profile is modified and
the Commit button is clicked.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
203
Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path
User Certificates
EAP-TLS authentication requires a user certificate. The user certificate must be stored in the
Windows certificate store.
•
To generate the user certificate, follow the instructions in “Generating a User
Certificate for the Mobile Device”, later in this chapter.
•
Import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store by following the
instructions in “Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device”, later in this
chapter.
•
A Root CA certificate is also needed for EAP-TLS. Refer to the section below.
Root CA Certificates
Root CA certificates are required for PEAP/MSCHAP, PEAP/GTC, and EAP-TLS. Two options
are offered for storing these certificates. They may be imported into the Windows certificate store
or copied into the Certs Path directory.
How To: Use the Certs Path
1.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”.
2.
Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device. The default location for
Certs Path is \System. A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global
variable. Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after warmboot.
3.
When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, do not check the Use
MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox.
4.
Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert textbox.
5.
Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
204
Summit Radio
How To: Use Windows Certificate Store
1.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”.
2.
To import the certificate into the Windows store, follow the instructions for “Installing a Root
CA Certificate on the Mobile Device” later in this chapter.
3.
When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, be sure to check the
Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox.
4.
The default is to use all certificates in the store. If this is OK, skip to Step #8.
5.
Otherwise, to select a specific certificate click on the Browse (…) button.
Figure 5-11 Choose Certificate
6.
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
7.
Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the
CA Cert textbox.
8.
Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
205
Summit Wireless Security
Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type
of wireless security used by the network. The instructions that follow are the minimum required
to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are listed in
these instructions. Please see your system administrator for complete information about your
network and its wireless security requirements.
To begin the configuration process:
•
On the Main tab, click the Admin Login button and enter the password.
•
LXE recommends editing the default profile with the parameters for your network.
Select the Default profile from the pull down menu.
Figure 5-12 Default Profile
•
Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section
determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the
changes.
Be sure to click the Commit button after all changes have been made.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
206
Summit Radio
No Security
To connect to a wireless network with no security, make sure the following profile options are
used:
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to None
•
Set Encryption to None
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-13 No Security
Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the
Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio
connects to the network.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
207
WEP
To connect using WEP, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to None
•
Set Encryption to Manual WEP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-14 WEP Encryption
Click the WEP keys/PSKs button.
Figure 5-15 WEP Keys
Valid keys are 10 (for 40 bit encryption) or 26 (for 128 bit encryption) hexadecimal characters.
Enter the key(s) and click OK.
Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the
Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio
connects to the network.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
208
Summit Radio
LEAP without WPA Authentication
To use LEAP (without WPA) make sure the following profile options are used:
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to LEAP
•
Set Encryption to Auto WEP
•
Set Auth Type as follows:
o
If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the
Auth Type radio parameter to Open.
o
If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio
parameter to LEAP.
Please see “WPA/LEAP” later in this section to configure the radio for WPA LEAP.
Figure 5-16 LEAP Configuration
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
209
To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On
Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the
network.
Figure 5-17 LEAP Credentials
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the
password and click OK.
Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the
Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio
connects to the network.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
210
Summit Radio
PEAP/MSCHAP
To use PEAP/MSCHAP, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP
•
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials” earlier in this chapter.
Click the Credentials button.
•
No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials
as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to
the network.
•
For Stored Credentials, User, Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be
entered.
Enter these items as directed below.
Figure 5-19 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
211
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Enter the password.
Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now.
Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab.
Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter.
Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store.
Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox.
Figure 5-20 PEAP/MSCHAP Certificate Filename
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
•
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button.
•
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
•
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials
screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
•
Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
•
Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user
authentication.
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate.
VX6 Reference Guide
212
Summit Radio
PEAP/GTC
To use PEAP/GTC, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to PEAP-GTC
•
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-21 PEAP/GTC
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter.
Click the Credentials button.
•
No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary as the user will be
prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network.
Enter these items as directed below.
Figure 5-22 PEAP/GTC Credentials
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Enter the password.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
213
Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now.
Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab.
Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter.
Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store.
Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox.
Figure 5-23 PEAP/GTC Certificate Filename
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
•
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button.
•
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
•
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials
screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
•
Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
•
Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user
authentication.
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate.
VX6 Reference Guide
214
Summit Radio
WPA/LEAP
To use WPA/LEAP, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to LEAP
•
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Please see “LEAP” earlier in this section to configure the radio for LEAP without WPA.
Figure 5-24 WPA/LEAP
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
215
To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On
Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the
network.
Figure 5-25 WPA/LEAP Credentials
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Enter the password.
Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and
warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the
network.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
216
Summit Radio
EAP-FAST
To use EAP-FAST, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST
•
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
The SCU supports EAP-FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning. With automatic PAC
provisioning, the user credentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on
screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled
to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device. Please refer to the “LXE Security
Primer” for more information on the RADIUS server configuration.
Figure 5-26 EAP-FAST Configuration
For automatic PAC provisioning, once a username/password is authenticated, the PAC
information is stored on the computer. The same username/password must be used to authenticate
each time. See the note on the next page for more details.
For manual PAC provisioning, the PAC filename and Password must be entered.
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
217
The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials (stored or sign on)
and the type of PAC provisioning (automatic or manual).
Click on the Credentials button.
To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On
Credentials with automatic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and
Password when connecting to the network.
Figure 5-27 EAP-FAST Credentials
To use Sign-On credentials:
•
Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Username and
Password when connecting to the network.
To use Stored Credentials:
•
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the
Username.
•
Enter the password.
To use Automatic PAC Provisioning:
•
No additional entries are required.
To use manual PAC Provisioning:
•
Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password.
•
The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global
variable. The PAC file must not be read only.
Tap OK then tap Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and
warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the
network.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
When using Automatic PAC Provisioning, once authenticated, there is a file stored in the
\System directory with the PAC credentials. If the username is changed, that file must be
deleted. The filename is autoP.00.pac.
VX6 Reference Guide
218
Summit Radio
EAP-TLS
To use EAP-TLS, make sure the following profile options are used.
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to EAP-TLS
•
Set Encryption to WPA TKIP
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-28 EAP-TLS
Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter.
Click the Credentials button.
•
No entries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are
necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name
and Password when connecting to the network.
•
For Stored Credentials, User, Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be
entered.
Enter these items as directed below.
Figure 5-29 EAP-TLS Credentials
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Summit Radio
219
Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username.
Leave the certificate file name entries blank for now.
Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab.
Once successfully authenticated, import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store.
Return to the Credentials screen.
Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certificate store. Highlight the desired
certificate and press the Select button. The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert
box.
Enter the password for the user certificate in the User Cert pwd box.
Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter.
Check the Validate server a checkbox.
Figure 5-30 EAP-TLS Credentials
If using the Windows certificate store:
•
Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store.
•
To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button.
•
Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox.
•
Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials
screen.
If using the Certs Path option:
•
Leave the Use MS store box unchecked.
•
Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox.
Click OK then click Commit.
The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP-TLS for the user
authentication.
For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this
chapter. For more information on generating a User certificate, see “User Certificate” later in this
chapter.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate.
VX6 Reference Guide
220
Summit Radio
WPA PSK
To connect using WPA/PSK, make sure the following profile options are used:
•
Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile
•
Set EAP Type to None
•
Set Encryption to WPA PSK
•
Set Auth Type to Open
Figure 5-31 WPA/PSK Encryption
Click WEP keys/PSKs button.
Figure 5-32 PSK Entry
This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value. Enter the key and click OK.
Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the
Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio
connects to the network.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
221
Cisco Radio
The Cisco radio is a 2.4GHz 802.11b radio. This radio supports no encryption, WEP, LEAP or
WPA (PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, EAP-TLS, WPA/LEAP and WPA-PSK).Configuring
without WPA
Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU)
Note:
When making changes to profile parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted afterwards.
Access:
Start | Programs | Cisco ACU or ACU Icon on Desktop
Figure 5-33 Cisco Aironet Client Utility
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
To configure WPA, please see “Configuring for WPA”, later in this section.
VX6 Reference Guide
222
Cisco Radio
Profiles Tab
Use this option to manage profiles and review firmware information, status, statistics and wireless
radio survey data.
Profile Parameter
SSID
Client Name
Infrastructure Mode
Power Save Mode
Network Security Type
WEP
Authentication Types
LEAP
Mixed Mode
World Mode
Data Rates
Transmit Power
Offline Channel Scan
Default
Blank
Blank
Yes
Fast PSP
None
No WEP
Open
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Auto
MAX
Enabled
Select an active profile to manage.
Figure 5-34 Cisco Profile Properties Screen
No Security
Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile.
• If no security is used, the only entry necessary on the Profile Properties screen may be the
SSID. If the SSID is left blank, the radio can associate to any available network.
• Network security must be set to None.
• WEP must be set to No WEP.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
223
WEP
To use WEP, create a new profile or select an exiting profile.
• WEP must be set to either Static WEP keys or Dynamic WEP keys. When one of the WEP
methods is selected, the WEP Keys button is active.
• Authentication must be set to Open
• The appropriate WEP keys must be entered:
o
40-bit WEP keys consist of 10 hexadecimal characters of 5 ASCII characters
o
128 bit WEP keys consist of 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters.
o
After a WEP key is entered, it will be hidden from view if you return to the screen.
However, the “Already Set” indicates if a key has previously been entered.
Tap the WEP Keys button to enter WEP information. If a key is already entered, the Already set?
Checkbox is checked. The previously entered key value is not displayed for security.
Figure 5-35 Cisco Profile WEP Keys
LEAP
Note:
The instructions in this section are for LEAP without WPA. Please see WPA/LEAP later
in this chapter for instructions on using LEAP with WPA.
Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile.
• Network security must be set to LEAP.
• The following parameters are accessible when LEAP is selected. Please enter the
appropriate information.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
o
User Name
o
User Password
o
User Domain (optional)
VX6 Reference Guide
224
Cisco Radio
Firmware Tab
Displays the current firmware version and allows you to load new firmware. Tap the Browse
button to locate the new firmware file.
Status Tab
Immediately runs status on : signal strength and signal quality.
Statistics Tab
Select the Receive Stats or Transmit Stats. The data is displayed on the screen.
Survey Tab
Immediately runs signal strength and quality and link speed. An option is available to Setup
parameters for Active Mode reporting.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
225
Configuring for WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is only available on VX6’s equipped with the
updated Cisco radio driver (release 2.60 or later).
WPA requires software revision 1ED or greater. To identify the software revision,
please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel.
S
Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and
Access Point for VX6 communication.
It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of
certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication
will fail.
System Requirements
To support Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), the VX6 must be equipped as follows:
•
Cisco 350 radio card with driver release 2.60 (or later).
The LXE VX6 supports WPA and all authentications. The Microsoft supplicant and Cisco
supplicants are used separately or together to provide support for the different authentications.
Most of the configuration is done with the Microsoft Wireless Configuration tool WPA/LEAP
requires the Cisco supplicant and configuration tool.
Installing Radio drivers
Which version of the Cisco driver should be installed depends on what authentication protocol is
to be configured.
•
Cisco PEAP should not be installed if using PEAP/MSCHAP.
•
Cisco PEAP must be installed if using PEAP/GTC.
•
For all other authentications (LEAP, EAP-TLS, WPA-PSK) it does not matter if
Cisco PEAP is installed or not.
To determine if Cisco PEAP is installed or to change the installation, follow the instructions
below.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
226
Cisco Radio
Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant
With a Cisco radio installed, open the Wireless network properties as described in “Wireless
Network Configuration”, later in this chapter. With the Authentication tab selected check the text
in the EAP type drop down box. Refer to the following figures to determine if Cisco PEAP is
installed.
Figure 5-36 No Cisco PEAP
Figure 5-37 Cisco PEAP installed.
If the Cisco installation is correct continue, with the configuration. If it is not correct, follow the
procedures below.
Note:
Instructions are also included in the README file located in the \SYSTEM folder.
There are two Cisco CAB files in the \SYSTEM folder of the VX6. The default files are:
•
CISCO.CAB
•
CISCOPEAP.CAB
The default CISCO.CAB file provides for all authentications except Cisco PEAP. When the
default CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure
labeled “No Cisco PEAP”, above.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
227
If Cisco PEAP is desired:
1.
Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOMSCHAP.CAB.
2.
Rename the CISCOPEAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB.
3.
Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry.
The renamed CISCO.CAB file provides for Cisco PEAP and PEAP/GTC authentications. When
the renamed CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the
figure labeled “Cisco PEAP Installed”, above.
If it becomes necessary to switch to a different authentication than Cisco PEAP or PEAP/GTC,
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
1.
Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOPEAP.CAB.
2.
Rename the CISCOMSCHAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB
3.
Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry.
VX6 Reference Guide
228
Cisco Radio
Wireless Network Configuration
Use the following instructions for all authentication protocols to configure the Microsoft Wireless
Network configuration utility unless WPA/LEAP is used. WPA/LEAP is configured with the
Cisco ACU (see Section “WPA/LEAP Authentication Configuration”).
Click the ACU icon on the desktop.
Figure 5-38 Cisco ACU Profile Selection
From the “Select Active Profile” pull down list, select <External Settings>.
Click OK and warmboot.
Figure 5-39 Cisco ACU Reboot Message
After booting up, the Microsoft Zero Config tool should start. If it does not, start configuring the
wireless connection by clicking on the icon on the task bar shown in below.
Figure 5-40 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
229
The Wireless Network Connection screen appears.
Figure 5-41 Wireless Information Screen
Make sure the “Notify me when new wireless networks are available” box is not checked.
Click the Advanced… button.
Figure 5-42 Advanced Wireless Settings
Make sure the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” box is checked.
Set the “Networks to access” drop down box to “Only access points”.
Click the OK button to return to the Wireless Information Screen.
Click the Add New … line.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
230
Cisco Radio
Figure 5-43 Wireless Network Properties
Enter the Network name (SSID) into the text field.
For PEAP/MSCHAP and EAP/TLS, set Encryption to TKIP and Authentication to WPA.
For WPA/PSK see “WPA/PSK Authentication Configuration”.
To configure the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box see the following sections for configuration of
each authentication protocol.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
231
PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration
The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/MS-CHAP protocol. The Cisco
CAB file without Cisco PEAP must be used with PEAP/MS-CHAP. See “Installing Radio
Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, for more information.
Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant
Figure 5-44 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties
With the radio parameters configured (see “Wireless Network Configuration”, earlier in this
chapter) set the EAP type to PEAP as shown above.
If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Radio Drivers”, earlier in this
chapter, to change the radio cab file.
Click the Properties button.
Figure 5-45 Authentication Settings
When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the
user authentication to be tested. When that works, come back to this screen and validate the
server certificate.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
232
Cisco Radio
The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network.
Figure 5-46 Wireless Network Login
Once authenticated, click the IP Information tab.
Figure 5-47 IP Information Tab
If the network is set to use DHCP, the VX6 displays the IP address given by the DHCP server.
Now go back and authenticate the server.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
233
Server Authentication
To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see
“Root Certificates”, later in this chapter.
Figure 5-48 Authentication Settings, Validate Server
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Click the Properties button.
Check the Validate server
Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes.
Figure 5-49 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID
Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the VX6 has authenticated to the
<SSID>, as shown in the figure above.
Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure
labeled “IP Information Tab”, earlier in this chapter.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
234
Cisco Radio
PEAP/ GTC Authentication Configuration
The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/GTC protocol.
Configuring the PEAP / GTC Supplicant
With the radio parameters configured set the EAP type to Cisco PEAP as shown below.
Figure 5-50 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties
If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Radio Drivers”, earlier in this
chapter, to change the radio cab file.
Click the Properties button.
Figure 5-51 PEAP Properties
When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the
user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, return to this screen and
validate the server certificate as shown later in this section.
Check the Always try to resume secure session box.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
235
Note:
This box must be checked for the LXE device to roam from one AP to another AP.
Click the OK button.
The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network.
Figure 5-52 Login Screen
Enter valid user credentials.
Once authenticated click the IP Information tab
Figure 5-53 IP Information Tab
The device displays the IP address given by the DHCP server.
Now go back and authenticate the server.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
236
Cisco Radio
Server Authentication
To validate the server certificate, the root CA certificate must be installed. For instructions for
installing, see “Installing a Root CA Certificate” in this chapter. The RADIUS server certificate is
not required, only the root CA which issued the server certificate.
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Click the Properties button.
Figure 5-54 PEAP Properties, Validate Server Certificate
Check the Validate server certificate box.
Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes.
When the login box appears enter valid user credentials.
It is possible for to be prompted to accept a Root CA certificate when using PEAP/GTC.
If the trusted root certificate box (as shown in the previous figure) is blank the user will be
prompted to accept the Root CA certificate by name as shown below.
Figure 5-55 Server Connection Warning
If this is the correct server certificate Root CA, click OK. If not, install the correct Root CA as
described in “Installing a Root CA Certificate” in this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
237
By clicking OK, the Trusted root certificate box is filled in on the properties window.
Figure 5-56 PEAP Properties, Trusted Root Certificate
The same thing can be done for the Connect only if server name ends in field. Check the box and
leave the field blank. A prompt window will appear asking for confirmation of the correct server
name.
Figure 5-57 Accept Server Connection Warning
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
238
Cisco Radio
Figure 5-58 PEAP Properties, Connect Only If Server Name Ends In
If the ACS server name is correct, click the OK button and the server name field will be filled in
with the correct server name.
The other option is to fill in the correct name
Figure 5-59 Wireless Information, Authenticated
Once the authentication completes the status will change to Authenticated to <SSID> as shown.
Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown previously in
this section.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
239
WPA/LEAP
LEAP is a Cisco proprietary authentication protocol and is not supported by the Microsoft
supplicant. To configure the VX6 for WPA/LEAP, use the Cisco ACU installed during normal
installation of the Cisco radio driver.
Cisco ACU
Start the Cisco ACU by clicking the icon on the desktop or navigate to Start | Programs | Cisco |
ACU.
Click on the Profile tab.
Figure 5-60 ACU Profile Tab
Click the Rename button.
Name the profile
Figure 5-61 Renaming Profile
Click the Edit button.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
240
Cisco Radio
The profile properties screen is displayed.
Figure 5-62 Profile Properties Screen
Enter the SSID and Client Name in the correct fields.
Set the Network Security Type to LEAP(WPA).
Click the OK button.
Figure 5-63 Select Profile
Use the drop down box to choose the profile just configured.
Click OK.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
241
The VX6 associates and displays the sign on screen.
Figure 5-64 Login Screen
Click the Status tab to display status.
Figure 5-65 ACU Status Tab
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
242
Cisco Radio
EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration
To authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol you need a user certificate file and a private key file.
Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control
panel. For EAP-TLS it does not matter which Cisco cab file is installed.
Note:
It is important that all dates are correct on the device when using any type of certificate.
Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail.
User Certificate
To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start | Control Panel | Certificates.
Set the drop down box to “My Certificates” as shown below.
The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane.
Figure 5-66 Certificate Stores
Click the View button.
Figure 5-67 View Certificate Details
Set the Field to Private Key
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
243
Make sure the private key is Present.
If it is not present, install the private key file.
If there is no user certificate refer to “User Certificates”, earlier in this chapter, to acquire a user
certificate and private key file.
Setting EAP/TLS Parameters
With the radio parameters configured (see “Wireless Network Configuration”) set the EAP type to
TLS as shown.
Figure 5-68 EAP/TLS Configuration
Click the Properties button.
Figure 5-69 Authentication Settings
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
244
Cisco Radio
Click the Select button to choose the user certificate.
Figure 5-70 Select Certificate
Figure 5-71 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details
Do not check the Validate server certificate box. This allows the user to be authenticated as the
first step.
When the user certificate successfully authenticates, come back to this screen and validate the
server certificate as described in the next section.
Click the OK button to dismiss the configuration screens.
When the radio re-connects the user is authenticated with the user certificate.
If the user does not authenticate, recheck the user certificate and the date on the computer.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Cisco Radio
245
Validating the Server Certificate
Before validating the server certificate, make sure the Root CA certificate is installed on the VX6.
Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen.
Click the Properties button.
Check the Validate server box as shown below.
Figure 5-72 Validate Server
Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes.
Figure 5-73 SSID Authenticated
Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the VX6 has authenticated to
<SSID> as shown above.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
246
Cisco Radio
WPA PSK Configuration
Figure 5-74 WPA PSK Configuration
Configure the Wireless Network Settings as described in “Wireless Network Settings”, earlier in
this chapter.
Change the Network Authentication to WPA-PSK.
Enter an ASCII network key in the text field. Hex keys do not work in the Microsoft Zero Config
utility at this time.
There is no server authentication when using WPA-PSK.
Click the OK button to complete configuration.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Symbol Radio
247
Symbol Radio
The Symbol radio is a 2.4GHz 802.11b radio. This radio supports no encryption and WEP.
Note:
When making changes to profile parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted afterwards.
Access:
Double Tap the Network Connected Icon in the Status Bar
Figure 5-75 Symbol NETWLAN Screen
IP Information Tab
After the IP Address has been assigned to the VX6, tap the Renew button to renew the IP address
if necessary.
Tap the Details button to view the Network Connection details.
IPv6 Information Tab
This is the TCP/IPv6 information screen. The contents cannot be edited by the user.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
IPv6 can be disabled. Please see “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages”, earlier in
this chapter.
VX6 Reference Guide
248
Symbol Radio
Wireless Information Tab
Factory Default Settings
Wireless Information tab
Notify when new networks available
Advanced Button
Use Windows to configure wireless settings
Automatically connect to non-preferred networks
Networks to access (Only APs, Only comp-to-comp)
Encryption (WEP, TKIP)
Authentication (WPA, Open, Shared, WPA-PSK)
Ad hoc network
Key provided automatically
Enable 802.1X authentication
EAP Type (MDF-Challenge, PEAP, TLS)
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
All available
WEP
WPA
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
TLS
Figure 5-76 Symbol Wireless Information Tab
View Log
Displays the logon/connection data for the current network connection.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Symbol Radio
249
Add a new connection
Select Add New. Enter the SSID in the Network Name text box.
Figure 5-77 Symbol Wireless Network Properties
Disable WEP
•
If WEP is to be disabled, tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box.
Select Open.
•
Tap the down arrow in the Encryption drop down box. Tap Disabled and WEP is
disabled.
•
Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab.
Enable WEP
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
Tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box.
•
Tap the WEP Authentication protocol.
•
If the key is provided automatically by your network, check the “Key provided
automatically” checkbox.
•
If you wish to enter your Authentication key, uncheck the “Key provided
automatically” checkbox and enter the Network Key in the Network Key text box.
•
Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab.
VX6 Reference Guide
250
Symbol Radio
Continue
Tap the Advanced … button on the Wireless Information Tab. Make sure there is a checkmark in
the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” checkbox. Make sure there is no
checkmark in the “Automatically connect to non-preferred networks” checkbox.
Tap OK to return to the Wireless Information tab.
Tap the Connect button.
Figure 5-78 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings
To access NETWLAN1 Properties again, double tap the Network Connected icon in the
Toolbar.
Select a User Certificate
1.
Select Wireless Information Tab
2.
Select a network by double tapping the network name.
3.
In the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box, enable 802.1X authentication
4.
Select an EAP type
5.
Tap the Properties button. Validate Server is enabled by default.
6.
At the Authentication Settings display, tap the Select button to choose a User Certificate.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
251
Certificates
Root Certificates
Generating a Root CA Certificate
Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and
installing root certificates.
The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA.
To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to
http://<CA IP address>/certsrv.
Sign into the CA with any valid username and password.
Figure 5-79 Logon to Certificate Authority
Figure 5-80 Certificate Services Welcome Screen
Click the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL link.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
252
Certificates
Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box.
Figure 5-81 Download CA Certificate Screen
Click the DER button.
To download the CA certificate, click on the Download CA certificate link.
Figure 5-82 Download CA Certificate Screen
Click the Save button and save the certificate. Make sure to keep track of the name and location
of the certificate.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
253
Installing a Root CA Certificate
Note:
This section is used for Cisco radios only. Summit radios do not use the Windows
certificate store. Instead, copy the certificate to the \System folder for use with a Summit
radio.
Copy the certificate file to the VX6. Import the certificate by navigating to Start | Control Panel
| Certificates.
Figure 5-83 Certificates
Click the “Import” button.
Figure 5-84 Import Certificate
Make sure “From a File” is selected and click OK.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
254
Certificates
Figure 5-85 Browsing to Certificate Location
Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the
certificate desired and click OK.
Figure 5-86 Certificate Import Confirmation
Click Yes to import the certificate.
Once the certificate is installed, return to the proper authentication section, earlier in this manual.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
255
User Certificates
User certificates are only needed for EAP-TLS.
Generating a User Certificate
Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and
installing user certificates.
The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA. To
request the user certificate, open a browser to
http://<CA IP address>/certsrv.
Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the
mobile device.
Figure 5-87 Logon to Certificate Authority
This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file. Windows CE equipped
devices such as the VX6 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including
the private key in the user certificate.
Figure 5-88 Certificate Services Welcome Screen
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
256
Certificates
Click the Request a certificate link.
Figure 5-89 Request a Certificate Screen
Click on the advanced certificate request link.
Figure 5-90 Advanced Certificate Request Screen
Click on the Create and submit a request to this CA link.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
257
Figure 5-91 Advanced Certificate Details
For the Certificate Template, select “User”.
Check the “Mark keys as exportable” and the “Export keys to file” checkboxes.
Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied. Also specify the private
key filename.
!
Be sure to note the name used for the private key file, for example
VX6USER.PVK. The certificate file created later in this process must be given
the same name, for example, VX6USER.CER.
DO NOT check to use strong private key protection.
Make any other desired changes and click the “Submit” button.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
258
Certificates
Figure 5-92 Script Warnings
If any script notifications occur, click the “Yes” button to continue the certificate request.
Figure 5-93 Script Warnings
When prompted for the private key password:
VX6 Reference Guide
•
Click “None” if you do not wish to use a password, or
•
Enter and confirm your desired password then click “OK”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
259
Figure 5-94 Certificate Issued
Click the Download certificate link.
Figure 5-95 Download Security Warning
Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC. Make sure to keep track of the
name and location of the certificate. The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this
process.
!
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key
file. For example, it the private key was saved as VX6USER.PVK then the
certificate file created must be given the same name, for example,
VX6USER.CER.
VX6 Reference Guide
260
Certificates
Installing a User Certificate
Copy the certificate and private key files to the VX6. Import the certificate by navigating to Start
| Control Panel | Certificates.
Select “My Certificates” from the pull down list.
Figure 5-96 Certificates
Click the “Import” button.
Figure 5-97 Import Certificate
Make sure “From a File” is selected and click OK.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
261
Figure 5-98 Browsing to Certificate Location
Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the
certificate desired and click OK.
The certificate is now shown in the list.
Figure 5-99 Certificate Listing
With the certificate you just imported highlighted, click View.
From the Field pull down menu, select “Private Key.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
262
Certificates
Figure 5-100 Private Key Not Present
•
If the private key is present, the process is complete.
•
If the private key is not present, import the private key.
To import the private key, click OK to return to the Certificates screen.
Click import.
Figure 5-101 Browsing to Private Key Location
Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the private key file, change
the Type pull down list to “Private Keys”, select the certificate desired and click OK. Enter the
password for the certificate if appropriate.
Click on View to see the certificate details again.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Certificates
263
Figure 5-102 Private Key Present
The private key should now say present. If it does not, there is a problem. Possible items to
check:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file, as shown
earlier in this section. If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key
file, generate a new certificate and follow the import process again.
•
Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name, for example
vx6user.cer for the certificate and vx6user.pvk for the private key file. If the file
names are not the same, rename the private key file and import it again.
VX6 Reference Guide
264
VX6 Reference Guide
Certificates
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Chapter 6 AppLock
Introduction
LXE’s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only. LXE
loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process.
Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device enduser. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator.
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured applications. The end user can still reboot
the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified applications are
automatically launched in the specified order and run in full screen mode when the device boots
up.
When the mobile device is reset to factory default values, for example after a cold reset, the
Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters.
LXE has made the assumption, in this chapter, that the first user to power up a new mobile device
is the system administrator.
Note:
AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter-relate with
similarly-named options contained in other LXE Control Panels.
Note:
A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot
prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has
closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application (see Auto
Re-Launch) which causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked,
the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end-user mode
to minimize the screen flicker.
AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available. Contact your LXE
representative for assistance, downloads and update availability.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
266
Introduction
Determining Your AppLock Version
Multi-Application AppLock
A mobile device running the Multi-Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, dual
application device. Only the applications or features specified in the AppLock configuration by
the Administrator are available to the end-user. This version offers a user-mode taskbar icon
allowing the end-user to switch between user applications.
If your Administrator Control Panel has Application, Security and Status tabs, then the device
has LXE Multi-Application AppLock installed. The Administrator can configure multiple
applications to lock and the end user can swap between the applications.
Figure 6-1 Multi-Application AppLock
The configuration instructions in this chapter are designed for users of Multi-Application
AppLock.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Introduction
267
Single Application AppLock
A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, single
application device. In other words, only the application or feature specified in the AppLock
configuration by the Administrator is available to the user.
If your Administrator Control Panel has Control, Security and Status tabs, then the device has
LXE’s Single-Application AppLock installed. The Administrator can configure a single
application to lock and the end user is limited to that application.
Figure 6-2 Single-Application AppLock
Though this chapter is designed for users of the newer Multi-Application AppLock, the
instructions may also be used to configure Single-Application AppLock with the following
differences:
• The Control tab is used to specify the application to lock instead of the Application tab.
While the Application tab contains provisions for multiple applications, the Control tab
only allows the administrator to specify a single application.
• The section on End User Switching Technique does not apply to this version.
• Some configuration items may not be available.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
268
Setup a New Device
Setup a New Device
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no
default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no
password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies the applications to lock, a
password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to
end-user mode.
Briefly, the process to configure a new device is as follows:
1.
Connect an external power source to the device and press the Power button.
2.
Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Install accessories.
3.
Tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon.
4.
Assign applications on the Control (single application) or Application (dual application) tab
screen.
5.
Assign a password on the Security tab screen.
6.
Select a view level on the Status tab screen, if desired.
7.
Tap OK
8.
Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application(s).
9.
The device is now in end-user mode.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Administration Mode
269
Administration Mode
Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device, hardware and software configuration
options.
The administrator must enter a valid password (when a password has already been assigned)
before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed. The administrator
can configure the following options:
• Create/change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access.
• Create/change the password for administrator access.
• Assign the name of the application, or applications, to lock.
• Select the command line of the application to lock.
In addition to these configuration options, the administrator can view and manage the status logs
of AppLock sessions.
Administrator default values for this device:
Administrator Hotkey
Shift+Ctrl+A
Password
none
Application path and name
none
Application command line
none
End User Mode
End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user
can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes. Each application is automatically launched and runs
in full screen mode when the device boots up.
The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute
any other applications. Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined
Windows CE key combinations, such as close (X) icon, File Exit, File Close, Alt-F4, Alt-Tab, etc.
are disabled. The Windows CE desktop icons, menu bars, task bar and system trays are not visible
or accessible. Task Manager is not available.
If the end-user selects File/Exit or Close from the applications menu bar, the menu is cleared and
nothing else happens; the application remains active. Nothing happens when the end-user clicks
on the Close icon on the application’s title bar and the application remains active.
Note:
A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot
prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has
closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application which
causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator
should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the
screen flicker.
Windows accelerator keys such as Alt-F4 are disabled.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
270
Passwords
Passwords
A password must be configured. If the password is not configured, a new device switches into
Administration mode without prompting for a password. In addition to the hotkey press, a mode
switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is
missing in the configuration.
There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured.
If the configured hotkey is pressed, the password prompt is displayed. In this case the user has 30
seconds to enter a password. If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the password
prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end-user mode.
All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt -- this is because
the other situations result in invalid end-user operation.
These conditions include:
• If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator, i.e. an application is
specified that does not exist.
• If the application name, which is mandatory for end-user mode, is missing in the
configuration.
• Invalid installation of AppLock (e.g. missing DLLs).
• Corrupted registry settings.
To summarize, if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode, the
password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered.
Troubleshooting
Can’t locate the password that has been set by the administrator? Enter this LXE back door key
sequence:
Ctrl+L Ctrl+X Ctrl+E
Or
Ctrl+5 Ctrl+9 Ctrl+3
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
End-User Switching Technique
271
End-User Switching Technique
Note:
The touch screen must be enabled.
Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu
A checkmark indicates applications currently active. Applications without a checkmark are
available for Launching by the user. When Keyboard is selected, the VX6 default input method
(Input Panel, Transcriber, or custom input method) is activated.
Using a Stylus Tap
When the mobile device enters end-user mode, a Switchpad icon (it looks like three tiny windows
one above the other) is displayed in the taskbar. The taskbar is always visible on top of the
application in focus.
When the user taps the Switchpad icon, a menu is displayed showing the applications available to
the user. The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is
brought to the foreground. The previous application continues to run in the background. Stylus
taps affect the application in focus only. When the user needs to use the Input Panel, they tap the
Keyboard option. Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only.
The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can
switch between applications using a stylus. The switchpad lists user applications as well as the
Keyboard option.
See Also: Application Panel | Launch | Manual (Launch) and Allow Close
Using the Switch Key Sequence
One switch key sequence (or hotkey) is defined by the administrator for the end-user to use when
switching between locked applications. This is known as the Activation key. The Activation key
is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter. When the switch key sequence
is pressed on the keypad, the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the
foreground and the previous application moves to the background. The previous application
continues to run in the background. End-user key presses affect the application in focus only.
See Also: Application Panel | Global Key
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
272
Application Configuration
Application Configuration
The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A.
Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device. When the hotkey is pressed to
switch into Administrator mode, a password prompt is displayed (if a password has been
configured). A password must be entered within 30 seconds (and within three tries) or the
password prompt is removed and the device remains in end-user mode with the focus returned to
the locked application. Without entry of a valid password, the switch into Administrator mode
will not occur.
Access:
Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon
The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured. When the valid password is
entered, the Administration Control panel is displayed. When a valid password is not entered
within 30 seconds, the user is returned to the System Control Panel.
If a password has not been configured, the Administrator Control panel is displayed.
Important: Before setting up multiple instances of the same application, make sure the
targeted software application will allow two instances to run at the same time.
Application Panel
Note:
Users of Single-Application AppLock have a Control tab instead of an Application tab.
Some of the options in this section do not apply to the Control tab.
Figure 6-4 Application Panel
Note:
If your Application Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the
Single Application version.
Single Application version.
Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in
End-user Mode.
If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed, the mobile device
reboots into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but an application has not been
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Application Configuration
273
specified, the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The
password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered.
Option
Explanation
Filename
Default is blank. Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type
the application path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard
Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the application
from the Browse dialog, tap OK.
Title
Default is blank. Enter the Title to be associated with the application. The
assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique
titles in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel.
Arguments
Default is blank. Enter the command line parameters for the application in
the Arguments text box.
Order
Default is 1. Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or
presented to the end-user. Applications are launched in lowest to highest
number order.
Internet
Default is Disabled. Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End-user
Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE) When the checkbox is enabled, the Internet
Menu and Internet Status are available. See the section titled End-user
Internet Explorer (EUIE) for more details.
Launch Button
See following section titled Launch Button.
Note:
AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not
inter-relate with similarly-named options contained in other LXE
Control Panels.
Global Key
Default is Ctrl+Spc. Select the Global Key key sequence the end-user is to
press when switching between applications. The Global Key default key
sequence must be defined by the AppLock Administrator. The Global key
is presented to the end-user as the Activation key.
Global Delay
Default is 10 seconds. Enter the number of seconds that Applications must
wait before starting to run after reboot.
Note:
Delay (Global) may not be available in all versions of AppLock.
You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for
the first application (lowest Order) launched and setting the delay
to 0 for all other applications. See Boot Options.
Input Panel
Default is Disabled. Enable (check) to show the Keyboard option on the
Switchpad menu. When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or
disabled for each individual application, and is available to the user for all
configured applications.
Clear Button
Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or
Application information. The Global settings are not cleared.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
274
Application Configuration
Option
Explanation
Scroll Buttons
Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen
to application setup screen. The left and right buttons update the
information on the screen with the previous or next configured application
respectively.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Application Configuration
275
Launch Button
Note:
The Launch button may not be available in all versions of Multi-AppLock. Contact your
LXE representative for assistance, downloads and AppLock update availability.
When clicked, displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration
panel.
Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options
Note:
Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab. The Order
value does not have to be sequential.
AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications.
Please note that the delays specified on this panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the
specified application(s). The timesouts specified on the Options panel are delays after AppLock
has attempted to launch the application.
Auto At Boot
Default is Enabled. Auto At Boot, when enabled, automatically launches (subject to the specified
Delay in seconds) the application after the unit is rebooted. If a Delay in seconds is specified,
AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application. The
Delay default value is 10 seconds; valid values are between 0 “no delay” and a maximum of 999
seconds.
Auto At Boot Retries is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure
occurs when the application is automatically launched at bootup. Valid values are between 0 (no
tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite. Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches.
The default is 0 retries.
Auto At Boot Delay timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected
application when it is automatically launched at bootup. Delay default is 10 seconds. Valid values
are between 0 seconds (no delay) and 999 seconds.
The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application; it will be either a value specified by the
Administrator or it will be the delay default value. At startup, when a delay has been assigned for
each application, AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before
launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second
application to expire before launching the second application. AppLock continues in this manner
until all applications are launched.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
A “Global Delay” can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application
to be launched (by lowest Order number) and no delay (0 seconds) for all other
applications.
VX6 Reference Guide
276
Application Configuration
Auto Re-Launch
Default is Enabled. Auto Re-Launch, when enabled for a specific application. automatically relaunches it (subject to the specified Auto Re-Launch Delay in seconds) after it terminates. This
option allows the Administrator to disable the re-launch operation. AppLock cannot prevent all
applications from closing. When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing
terminates, perhaps because of an error condition, AppLock re-launches the application when this
option is enabled.
Note:
If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re-launch and Manual (Launch) are disabled,
the application cannot be restarted for the end-user or by the end-user after the
application terminates.
Auto Re-Launch Retries default is 0 tries. Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to relaunch the application. The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and
controlled by AppLock. Valid values are between 0 (no tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite.
Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches.
Auto Re-Launch Delay timer default is 0 seconds (no delay). Delay is the amount of time
AppLock waits prior to re-launching an application that has terminated. The delay is specified in
seconds. Valid values are between 0 (no delay) and 99 seconds.
AppLock must also be configured to automatically re-launch an application. To AppLock,
application termination by the end-user is indistinguishable from application termination for any
other reason.
Manual (Launch)
Default is Disabled. Enabling this option allows the end-user to launch the specified
application(s). Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the
Switchpad accompanied by a checkmark that indicates the application is currently active.
Applications without a checkmark are available for Launching. When an application name is
tapped by the end-user, the application is launched (if inactive) and brought to the foreground.
Applications set up with Manual (Launch) enabled may or may not be launched at bootup. This
function is based on the application’s Auto At Boot setting. The applications have been listed as
approved applications for end-user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure. The
approved applications are listed on the Switchpad. A checkmark indicates the applications active
status.
When Manual (Launch) is disabled for an application, and Allow Close is enabled for the
application, when the end-user closes the specific application it is no longer available (shown) on
the Switchpad.
When Auto At Boot and Manual (Launch) are both disabled for a specific application, the
application is 1) not placed on the list of approved applications for end-user manual launch and 2)
never launched, and 3) not displayed on the Switchpad.
Allow Close
Default is Disabled. When enabled, the associated application can be closed by the end-user.
This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to
be terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end-user’s request. Error conditions may
generate a topmost popup requiring an end-user response, memory resource issues requiring an
end-user response, etc. Also at the administrator’s discretion, these types of applications can be
started manually (see Manual [Launch]) by the end-user.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Application Configuration
277
Match
Default is blank (match is not used).
AppLock works by associating display windows with the launched process ID. If an application
uses different process IDs for windows it creates, the Match field must be used.
Use the Match field to specify up to 32 characters of the class name for the application.
For example, DOS applications using a standard DOS display box should specify condev_appcls
in the Match textbox.
End User Internet Explorer (EUIE)
AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA
applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in
Internet Explorer’s address bar.
To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and
Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an
Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode: End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE). The
EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address
bar and status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the
address bar.
The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of
the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the Application text
box.
When the Internet checkbox is enabled, the Menu and Status check boxes are available.
Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like
Back, Forward, Home, Refresh, etc., functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users.
When the Menu checkbox is blank, the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are
unavailable.
When the Status checkbox is enabled, the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the
end-user when they are navigating the Internet.
If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired, it should be
treated like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the
Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this
case, do not check the Internet checkbox.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
278
Application Configuration
Security Panel
Figure 6-6 Security Panel
Hotkey
Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user
modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is
Shift+Ctrl+A.
A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence.
Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the
Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the
application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not
passed to the application.
Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must
be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot
key text box with “Shift”, “Alt”, and “Ctrl” text strings representing the shift state keys. The
normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. The hotkey must be entered via the keypad.
Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel. Also, hotkeys entered via the SIP are not
guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes.
For example, if the ‘Ctrl’ key is pressed followed by ‘A’, “Ctrl+A” is entered in the text box. If
another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey
sequence is started.
A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a
mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the
hotkey is pressed to switch modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot be
entered from the SIP.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Application Configuration
279
Password
Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm
Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive.
When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify
that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error.
After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be
entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved.
See Also:
Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock
Options Panel
AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications.
Please note that the delays specified on the Launch panel are delays before AppLock attempts to
start the specified application(s). The timeouts specified on this panel are delays after AppLock
has attempted to launch the application.
Figure 6-7 Options Panel
Launch timeout
This timeout specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait for the application
to initially launch after the application has been called. For example, if the application takes time
to launch and then initialize before a display a window is created, use this delay to specify the
delay period.
Replace timeout
This timeout specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait after an initial
screen (like a password prompt screen) is replaced by another application window.
Restart timeout
This specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait for an application to
restart. If the application fails to restart automatically, AppLock then proceeds according to the
options selected when the application was configured on the Application and Launch panels.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
280
Application Configuration
Status Panel
Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which
messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation.
Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile
specified by the Administrator. For this reason, the administrator can configure the type of status
information that is logged, as well as clear the status information.
Figure 6-8 Status Panel
Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button
(the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the logfile
from the Browse dialog, tap OK.
Note:
If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single
Application version which does not have as many options.
Error
Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by
the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked.
Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly
intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with
their AppLock program.
Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process
Logging.
All messages are displayed.
View
Process
Extended
All
Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are
displayed, all others are not displayed.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Application Configuration
281
Log
Note:
If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the
administrator.
In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be
logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is ‘None’;
however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the
configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry.
•
None
•
Error
•
Processing
•
Extended
•
All
Save As
When the 'Save As'… button is selected, a standard 'Save As' dialog screen is displayed. Specify
the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be
overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created.
See Also:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Error Messages
VX6 Reference Guide
282
Troubleshooting AppLock
Troubleshooting AppLock
The mobile device won’t switch from Administration mode to end-user mode.
•
If the configuration is valid for one application but not the other, the switch to enduser mode fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the
Administrator password is entered.
•
If two copies of the same application are configured, but the application only allows
one copy to run at a time, for example Microsoft Pocket Word and LXE RFTerm,
the switch to end-user fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped
until the Administrator password is entered.
The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed. What does this mean?
When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes, they
are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications.
LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY.
When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is
specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator, the following error message is displayed in a
message box:
Selected hotkey is not allowed. Please reenter.
When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device, the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use.
See Also: Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and
AppLock Registry Settings.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Appendix A Key Maps
The VX6 Keypad
ESC
CTRL
SHIFT
ALT
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
@
!
|
E
;
\
A
SP
$
#
W
BKLT
F5
F4
%
^
R
T
:
&
D
F
G
Z
X
C
V
(
*
,
I
.
H
J
B
N
F9
)
O
P
PgUp
?
K
_
~
F8
F7
U
Y
‘
S
F6
L
Home
PgDn
CAPS
/
2nd
=
F10
INS
BKSP
ENTER
END
M
[
<
7
4
1
0
{
]
8
5
2
+
}
>
9
6
3
DEL
.
Figure A-1 VX6 QWERTY Keyboard
The key map table that follows lists the commands used when running LXE’s VX6.
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the
key sequence.
Note:
The VX6 keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator. NumLock isalways On.
When the VX6 boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or
CapsLock) condition can be set toggled with a <2nd>+<F1> key sequence. The CAPS
LED on the keyboard is illuminated when CapsLock is On. The warmboot behavior of
CapsLock can be set via the MX3-VXC Options tab in the Windows CE Control Panel.
Please see Chapter 3 for more details.
Press These Keys and Then
To get this key
nd
2
Press this key
CapsLock
F4
Decrease Brightness 4
x
F5
5
x
F6
5
x
F7
x
F8
Decrease Contrast
Increase Volume
6
Alt
x
Increase Contrast
5
Ctrl
4
Increase Brightness
4
Shift
6
The Brightness Adjustment keys have no function. Brightness is adjusted via the buttons on
the VX6 control panel.
The Contrast Adjustment keys have no function because the VX6 is equipped with a TFT
display that has no provision for these adjustments.
The Volume Control keys have no function as the volume control is adjusted via the Windows
CE Control Panel.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
284
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
Press These Keys and Then
To get this key
nd
2
Press this key
CapsLock
x
F9
x
F3
2nd
2nd
Shift
Shift
Alt
Alt
Ctrl
Ctrl
Esc
Esc
Space
Sp
Enter
Enter
Enter (numeric)
x
Enter
CapsLock (Toggle)
x
F1
Back Space
Ins/BkSp
Tab
Tab
x
8
Ctrl-Break
Pause
Tab
x
x
x
F2
F2
Up Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Left Arrow
Insert
x
Ins/BkSp
Delete (numeric)
x
DOT
Home
x
Left Arrow
End
x
Right Arrow
Page Up
x
Up Arrow
Page Down
x
Down Arrow
Right Shift
x
x
F7
Right Alt
x
x
F8
Right Ctrl
x
x
F9
ScrollLock
x
x
F4
9
x
x
F10
NumLock
9
Alt
7
BackTab
8
Ctrl
Decrease Volume 6
Suspend/Resume
7
Shift
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
The Suspend/Resume key has no function as Windows Power Management controls all power
management modes on the VX6.
Press <Ctrl> then <2nd> then <F2> to produce Ctrl-Break.
NumLock is always On. This keypress sequence has no effect.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
To get this key
285
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
F8
F8
F9
F9
F10
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
F10
F11
x
x
F1
F12
x
x
F2
a
A
b
B
c
C
d
D
e
E
F
F
g
G
h
H
I
I
j
J
k
K
l
L
m
M
n
N
o
O
p
P
q
Q
r
R
s
S
t
T
u
U
v
V
w
W
x
X
y
Y
z
Z
A
x
A
B
x
B
C
x
C
D
x
D
E
x
E
VX6 Reference Guide
286
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
Shift
Ctrl
F
VX6 Reference Guide
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
x
F
G
x
G
H
x
H
I
x
I
J
x
J
K
x
K
L
x
L
M
x
M
N
x
N
O
x
O
P
x
P
Q
x
Q
R
x
R
S
x
S
T
x
T
U
x
U
V
x
V
W
x
W
X
x
X
Y
x
Y
Z
x
Z
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
0
0
DOT
DOT
<
x
0
[
x
1
]
x
2
>
x
3
=
x
4
{
x
5
}
x
6
/ (numeric)
x
x
7
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies
To get this key
287
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
/ (alpha)
x
- (numeric)
x
- (alpha)
x
+ (numeric)
x
+ (alpha)
x
9
* (numeric)
x
I
* (alpha)
x
: (colon)
x
D
; (semicolon)
x
F
?
x
L
`
x
N
_ (underscore)
x
M
, (comma)
x
J
‘ (apostrophe)
x
H
~ (tilde)
x
B
\
x
S
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
7
x
8
8
x
x
9
I
|
x
A
“
x
G
!
x
Q
@
x
W
#
x
E
$
x
R
%
x
T
^
x
Y
&
x
U
(
x
O
)
x
P
VX6 Reference Guide
288
IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad
IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad
PA1
ESC
2ND
PA3
PA2
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F5
F4
F6
@
!
Attn
SHIFT
|
$
#
W
E
;
\
%
R
&
^
T
:
‘
D
S
,
G
F
O
P
Z
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
INS
BKSP
4
{
5
}
6
K
L
ENTER
[
1
]
2
>
3
NL
C
X
PgUp
?
J
H
_
~
SP
)
I
.
Clr
ALT
/
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
CAPS
F10
Del
SysReq
A
F9
Ins
Rst
CTRL
F8
F7
V
B
N
Home
PgDn
<
END
M
0
DEL
.
Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad
This keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running
LXE’s RFTermTM program. When running this program please refer to the RFTermTM Reference
Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences.
IBM 5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad
ESC
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F5
F4
F6
Dup
CTRL
@
!
Attn
SHIFT
|
E
;
S
%
R
^
T
&
:
D
‘
F
G
H
SP
.
J
X
C
V
B
N
/
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
P
INS
BKSP
Field Exit
PgUp
L
ENTER
[
4
1
{
]
5
2
}
>
6
3
Fld-
_
~
Z
)
O
?
K
NL
Clr
ALT
I
Fld+
,
CAPS
F10
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
F9
Ins
Del
SysReq
\
A
$
#
W
F8
F7
Home
PgDn
END
M
<
0
DEL
.
Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad
This keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running
LXE’s RFTermTM program. When running this program please refer to the RFTermTM Reference
Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Appendix B Technical Specifications
Physical Specifications
Features
Specification
CPU
400MHz Intel® PXA255
Memory
Display
Mass Storage
Comments
10
ROM
128 MB Flash
RAM
128MB of SDRAM 9
Controller
SVGA compatible controller
Type
TFT Half Screen +
Compact Flash
PCMCIA
Secure Digital
System Memory
Various sizes supported.
Compact Flash supported via
PCMCIA adapter.
PCMCIA/CardBus Interface
Two (2) PCMCIA: Accepts
Type I and II PCMCIA cards.
External
Connectors/
Interfaces
Two (2) external RS-232C serial
ports: COM1 and COM3 11
9-pin “D” (male)
connectors
One USB Host and one USB
Client Port
Via Adapter Cable
One (1) Ethernet Port
Power Connector
12-80V DC input power
Power Switch
Sealed power switch
Beeper
Minimum loudness greater than
95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit
Dimensions
Length: 12.2 in (30.98 cm)
5-pin connector
Width: 9.6 in (24.38 cm)
Depth: 3.7 in (9.39 cm)
10
11
Battery for CMOS
Internal lithium Battery
External
Power
Supply
120-240VAC to 12VDC
AC Adapter
64MB Flash and 64MB RAM options have been discontinued.
The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
290
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Specifications
The VX6 will withstand the following environmental characteristics and has been tested in
accordance with applicable sections of MIL-STD-810E.
Feature
Specification
Altitude
Operational to 10,000 ft. (3048 meters)
Operating Temperature
Standard version:
-4°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C) [non-condensing]
Extended temperature version:
-22º to 122º F (-30ºC to 50ºC [condensing]
Storage Temperature
Standard version:
-22°F to 140°F (-30°C to 60°C) [non-condensing]
Extended temperature version:
-22°F to 140°F (-30°C to 60°C) [condensing]
Water, Sand and Dust
Humidity
IP66 per IEC60529
Standard version:
Up to 90% Non-condensing at 40°C (104°F)
Extended temperature version:
100%
Vibration
ESD
Shock
VX6 Reference Guide
Bounce loose cargo for 0.5 hour duration. Common carrier
transportation, transit face.
15 kV
75G, 5msec duration, 100 shock impacts
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Environmental Specifications
291
Display Specifications
Characteristic
Type
Specification
TFT
SVGA
Resolution
800 X 320 pixels (25 lines x 80 characters)
Cell Size
8 x 16 pixels
(8 x 8 also supported – 25 lines x 80 chars)
Dot Dimensions
Display Dimensions
.30mm x .30mm
280mm x 218mm x 11mm (11.0” x 8.6” x 0.4”)
Viewing Area
249mm x 187.5mm (9.8” x 7.38”)
Active Display Area
246mm x 98.3mm (9.7” x 3.87”)
UPS Battery Pack Specifications
Feature
Specification
Altitude
Operational to 10,000 ft. (3048 meters)
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to +122 °F)
Storage Temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F)
Water, Sand and Dust
IP66 per IEC60529
Humidity
10-90% Non-condensing at 40°C (104°F)
Vibration
Bounce loose cargo for 0.5 hour duration. Common
carrier transportation, transit face.
ESD
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
15 kV
VX6 Reference Guide
292
Network Device Specifications
Network Device Specifications
Summit 802.11b/g CF 2.4GHz
Bus Interface:
Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS
OFDM
RF Data Rates:
1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
RF Power Level:
64 mW (18dBm)
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Summit 802.11a/b/g CF 2.4/5.0GHz
Bus Interface:
Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS
OFDM
5.x - 5.x GHz IEEE 802.11a DSSS OFDM
RF Data Rates:
1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
RF Power Level:
64 mW (18dBm)
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Bus Interface
CF card via a PCMCIA adapter
Enhanced Data Rate
Up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air
Connection
No less than 32.80 ft (10 meters) line of sight
Bluetooth Version
2.0 + EDR
Operating Frequency:
2.402 - 2.480 GHz
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
QDID
B013455
Bluetooth
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Network Device Specifications
293
PCMCIA Cisco 2.4GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
RF Data Rates:
11 Mbps
RF Power Level:
100 mW
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.5 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
RF Data Rates:
11 Mbps maximum
RF Power Level:
100 mW
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan
Operating Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Storage Temperature
see VX6 Environmental Specifications
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
294
VX6 Reference Guide
Network Device Specifications
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Appendix C VX6 CE .NET 4.2
Introduction
There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX6. Many of the setup
and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software
installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only, the
configuration of your specific VX6 computer may vary. The following sections provide a general
reference for the configuration of the VX6 and some of its optional features.
Your VX6 operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. The VX6
operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE .NET or Windows CE. This is the
factory default value for the Desktop Display Background.
This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE .NET 4.2 only. Windows CE
5.0 information and procedures are contained in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
Windows CE . NET 4.2 Operating System
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE
user’s guides or the Windows CE on-line Help application installed with the VX6.
This chapter’s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows
options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers.
Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the
VX6 and its Windows CE environment.
Wireless Network Configuration
All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”.
Warmboot
A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data. However, any applications
installed to RAM are lost, as is all data in RAM. This happens because the operating system is
stored on the flash drive, but must be loaded into RAM to run.
All registry configurations are automatically preserved. Any applications stored as .CAB files in
the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the
Launch utility.
Coldboot
A coldboot reboots the computer, erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory
default settings. In order to be preserved, applications and data must be stored in the System
folder. Registry information is not preserved. Only factory default applications and drivers stored
as .CAB files in the System directory are loaded by Launch.
A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the \Windows directory. This
application automatically cold boots the VX6, erasing any customer applied registry changes and
returning the VX6 to its factory settings.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
296
Installed Software
Installed Software
When you order a VX6 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed
for operation and radio communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories
in the VX6.
This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files. Files
installed in each VX6 are specific to the intended function of the VX6.
Files installed in each VX6 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio
specific drivers – the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the manufacturer (e.g. Summit,
Cisco, Symbol) for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable.
Software Load
The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE .NET 4.2 hardware-specific
OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and
utilities. The software supported is summarized below:
Operating System
• Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system components, including
Windows CE .NET 4.2 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for remote
APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input,
window management, and common controls.
Network and Device Drivers
Wavelink Avalanche (Optional)
LXE AppLock
Java (Optional)
• Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option (when installed).
Terminal Emulation (Optional)
• RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot
(if installed).
LXE API Routines (see “Accessories” for the LXE SDK Kit part number)
Note:
Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are
released by LXE.
Software Applications
The following applications are included:
VX6 Reference Guide
•
WordPad (was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE)
•
Word Viewer
•
Excel Viewer
•
PDF Viewer
•
Image Viewer
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Installed Software
297
•
Scanner Wedge (LXE developed)
•
ActiveSync
•
Transcriber
•
Media Player
•
Internet Explorer
Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them.
Java (Optional)
Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the
EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of Java examples and Plug-ins is also installed
with the Java option. LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device.
LXE RFTerm (Optional)
Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm.
Please refer to “Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters” earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick
start instruction. Refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD for complete
information and instruction.
AppLock
Installed by LXE. Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start | Settings | Control
Panel | Administration. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator
for the mobile device end-user. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user
mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still
reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is
automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up.
See Also: Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction.
Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional)
The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in
conjunction with the Avalanche Molility Center (MC) Console.
After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network
parameter configuration is supported for:
•
IP address: DHCP or static IP
•
RF network SSID
•
DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary)
•
Subnet mask
•
Enabler update
Related Manual: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”.
The VX6 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile
device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE
devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used.
After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin
normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
298
Installed Software
application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel
through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager
is LXE_VXC.
LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files
upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE
representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline.
If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler
should not be installed on the mobile device(s).
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Desktop
299
Desktop
For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE
user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile
device.
The VX6 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP.
At a minimum, it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My
Computer, Internet Explorer, and the Recycle Bin.
At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to
pop up. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents,
Settings, Help, and Run.
Desktop Icon
Function
My Computer
Access files and programs.
Recycle Bin
Storage for files that are to be deleted.
Internet Explorer
Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires radio card and
Internet Service Provider – ISP enrollment is not available
from LXE).
Wireless Configuration Icon
Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration
utility, either the SCU (Summit Client Utility) or ACU
(Cisco Aironet Client Utility).
Bluetooth
Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth
devices.
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications.
Start
Access programs, select from the Favorites listing,
documents last worked on, change/view settings for the
control panel or taskbar, on-line help or run programs.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
300
Desktop
Folders Copies at Startup
The following folders are copied on startup:
System\Desktop => Windows\Desktop
System\Favorites => Windows\Favorites
System\Fonts
=> Windows\Fonts
System\Help
=> Windows\Help
System\Programs => Windows\Programs
This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders.
The following folders are NOT copied on startup:
Windows\AppMgr
Windows\Recent
Windows\Startup
Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect.
Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed
too early in the boot process so it has no effect.
Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are
not parsed by launch.
My Computer Folders
Folder
Description
System
Internal ATA Card
Yes
Network
Mounted network drive
No
Storage Card
PCMCIA
No
Media Card
SD
No
Windows
Operating System in ROM
No
Program Files
Applications
No
Application Data
Data saved by running applications
No
My Documents
Storage for downloaded files / applications
No
Temp
Location for temporary files
No
VX6 Reference Guide
Preserved upon Reboot?
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
301
Start Menu Program Options
The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be
different based on the software and hardware options purchased.
Access:
Start | Programs
Cisco
Set Cisco radio / network parameters
(Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details)
Communication
Stores Network communication options
ActiveSync
Transfer files between a VX6 and a desktop computer
Connect
Run this command after setting up a connection
Start FTP Server
Begin connection to FTP server
Stop FTP Server
End connection to FTP server
Microsoft File Viewers
View downloaded files (see Note)
Excel Viewer
View Excel 97 and newer documents
Image Viewer
View BMP, JPEG and PNG images
PDF Viewer
View Adobe Acrobat documents
Word Viewer
View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files
Summit
Set Summit radio / network parameters
(Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details)
Command Prompt
The command line interface in a separate window
Internet Explorer
Access web pages on the world wide Internet
Java
Option
LXE RFTerm
Option. Terminal emulation application.
Media Player
Music management program
Microsoft WordPad
Opens an ASCII notepad
Remote Desktop Connection
Log on to a Windows Terminal Server
Transcriber
Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen
Avalanche
Option. Remote management for networked devices
Windows Explorer
File management program
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected.
VX6 Reference Guide
302
Start Menu Program Options
Communication
Access:
Start | Programs | Communication
ActiveSync
Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect, ActiveSync will synchronize
using the radio link on the VX6. See also: Chapter 1 “Introduction”, section “ActiveSync – Initial
Setup”.
Requirement:
ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop)
computer. ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website. Follow their
instructions to locate, download and install ActiveSync on your desktop
computer.
For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then
open ActiveSync Help. See also section titled “Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync” for more
ActiveSync information.
Synchronizing from the VX6 using a USB ActiveSync connection:
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device.
1.
To initiate synchronization from your device, connect the USB cable to the PC and to the
dongle cable on the VX6. The VX6 connects automatically.
2.
Click the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC.
3.
Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect.
4.
To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on
the desktop PC.
Synchronizing from the VX6 using Serial or RF connection:
You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first
synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device.
1.
To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication |
ActiveSync to begin the process.
2.
Click the Connect button.
3.
Tap the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC.
4.
Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect.
5.
To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on
the desktop PC.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
303
Connect
Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host. Several pre-defined connect setups
are included in the factory setup:
•
COM1 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud
•
COM3
•
USB direct connect
12
direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud
The default connect setup is USB direct connect.
After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to
connect to a host. After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established, the
ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link.
See Also: “Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection”
Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server
These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server. The server defaults to
Off (for security) unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu.
12
The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
304
Start Menu Program Options
Command Prompt
Access:
Start | Programs | Command Prompt
Figure C-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen
Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands.
Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close.
Internet Explorer
Access:
Start | Programs | Internet Explorer
This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in the
Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC
Internet Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Internet Explorer Help.
Media Player
Access:
Start | Programs | Media Player
There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general
desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Click the “?” button to access Media
Player Help.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Start Menu Program Options
305
Remote Desktop Connection
Access:
Start | Programs | Remote Desktop Connection
There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to
the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options.
Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button.
Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and
Experience tabs. Click the “?” button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help.
Note:
VX6 and Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop
Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select Preload or 0409
(depending on system software revision) from the keymap popup. Click OK.
Transcriber
Access:
Start | Programs | Transcriber
Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu. To make changes to the Transcriber
application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., click the “hand with a pen”
icon in the toolbar. Click the “?” button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help.
Windows Explorer
Access:
Start | Programs | Windows Explorer
There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the
general desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Windows Explorer
Help.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
306
Start Menu Program Options
Taskbar
Access:
Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu
Factory Default Settings
Always on Top
Enabled
Auto hide
Disabled
Show Clock
Enabled
There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop
PC Windows Taskbar options.
When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button
appear.
Figure C-2 Taskbar Properties
Advanced Tab
Expand Control Panel
Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the
Settings | Control Panel menu option.
Clear Contents of Document Folder
Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
307
Control Panel Options
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel
Getting Help
Please click the “?” box to get Help when changing Control Panel options.
Option
Function
About
Displays hardware and software details.
Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, display or mouse functions.
Administrator
Control
AppLock configuration. (See Chapter 6, “AppLock”.)
Aironet Client Utility
Set the parameters for a Cisco radio. (See section “Start Menu
Program Options”, only present if Cisco radio software installed.)
Bluetooth
Discover and manage Bluetooth devices.
Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Date/Time
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by
LXE).
Display
Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme
properties.
Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Internet Options
Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet
connectivity.
Keyboard
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Mixer
Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input.
Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen.
Network and Dial
Up Options
Set network driver properties and network access properties.
Owner
Set VX6 owner details.
Password
Set VX6 access password properties.
PC Connection
Control the connection between the VX6 and a local desktop or laptop
computer.
PCMCIA
Manage PCMCIA cards.
Power
Displays the status of all power managed devices.
Regional Settings
Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional
and language settings.
Remove Programs
Remove user installed programs in their entirety.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
308
Control Panel Options
Option
Function
Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner
port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data
bits for available COM ports. (See Chapter 4, “Scanner”.)
Stylus
Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
System
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage
and Program memory settings.
Volume and Sounds
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE
events.
Wi-Fi
Set the parameters for a Summit radio. See Chapter 5, “Wireless
Network Configuration” for details on the SCU.
About
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | About
Displays hardware and software details.
Tab Title
Contents
Software
GUID, Windows Windows CE version, OAL Version, Bootloader Version,
Compile Version, FPGA Version and Language
Hardware
CPU Type, Codec Type, FPGA Version, Scanner type, Display, Flash memory,
and DRAM memory
Versions
LXE Utilities, LXE Drivers, LXE Image, LXE API, and Internet Explorer
Network IP
Current network connection IP and MAC address.
User application version information can be shown in the Version window. Version window
information is taken from the registry.
Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “VX6 Utilities”). LXE
recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of
the registry before changes are made.
The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \
LXE \ Version in the registry.
Create a new string value under this key. The string name should be the Application name to
appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in
the Version window.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
309
Language and Fonts
The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image.
Figure C-3 About Properties, Software
The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab:
•
English only – No additional fonts are built into the OS
•
Japanese
•
Simplified Chinese
•
Traditional Chinese
•
Korean
The above listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built-in to the VX6 OS image. Built-in
fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup. Thai, Hebrew,
Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the (English only) default (extended) fonts.
When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the /System folder; the font works for Asian
web pages, the font works with RFTerm, the font does not work for Asian options in Regional
Settings control panel, the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names, the
font does not work for third-party .NET applications, the font does not work for some third-party
MFC applications.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
310
Control Panel Options
Identifying Software Versions
The “Versions” tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all
installed software installed on the VX6 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the
applications loaded on the VX6. The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software
installed. Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level (i.e.: in the example
below, the revision level is 2BT).
Figure C-4 About Properties, Versions
Radio MAC Address
The “Network IP” tab displays the MAC address of the radio card.
Figure C-5 About Properties, Network IP
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
311
Accessibility
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility
Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sound
function. There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Figure C-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard
Note:
The StickyKeys option SHOULD NOT be used on the VX6. It does not work for the
integrated VX6 keyboard.
If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as
the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE
operating system.
.
Figure C-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound
If the SoundSentry option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual
warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft
Windows CE operating system.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
312
Control Panel Options
Administrator Control
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single (or multi)
application devices. In other words, only the application(s) or feature(s) specified in the AppLock
configuration by the Administrator are available to the user.
LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no
default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no
password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password
is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user
mode.
AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the
Administrator.
To set the AppLock parameters, please see Chapter 6, “AppLock” for details.
Bluetooth
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not supported with the Windows CE .NET Operating System. Please contact your
LXE representative for upgrade options.
Certificates
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates
Manage digital certificates used for secure communication.
Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX6 user. These values may change based on the type
of radio security resident in the client, access point or the host system.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
313
Date/Time
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon
Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings.
Factory Default Settings
Current Time
Midnight
Time Zone
GMT-05:00
Daylight Savings Disabled
Figure C-8 Date/Time Properties
There is little change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the settings
and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear.
If an Internet connection is available, click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server.
The VX6 includes a GrabTime utility:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this
control panel.
•
GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up. Please see
“Enabling GrabTime”, later in this chapter, for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
314
Control Panel Options
Dialing
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing
Figure C-9 Dialing
Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the “?” and
follow the instructions in Help.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
315
Display
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon
Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties.
Factory Default Settings
Background
Tile
Appearance
Scheme:
Backlight
Battery Auto Turn Off
Idle Time
External Auto Turn Off
Idle Time
Windowsce
Disable
Windows Standard
Enabled
30 seconds
Enabled
2 minutes
Background
There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Adjust the
settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Appearance
No change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Appearance options. Adjust the settings
and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The default is
Windows Standard.
Backlight
Figure C-10 Display Properties / Backlight Tab
Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect
immediately. When the backlight timer expires, the display, display backlight and keyboard
backlight are all turned off.
Note:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to which the VX6 is
mounted is in motion. This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled
using the Scanner control panel. Please see “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 4
“Scanner”, for details.
VX6 Reference Guide
316
Control Panel Options
Input Panel
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel
Select the current key / data input method.
Factory Default Settings
Input Method
Allow applications to
change input panel state
Keys
Use gestures
Keyboard
Disabled
Small keys
Disabled
Figure C-11 Input Panel Properties
Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data.
Selecting Keyboard enables both.
The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the input panel, make sure the checkbox for
“Allow applications to change input panel state” is checked and warmboot the VX6.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
317
Internet Options
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options
Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet connectivity.
Factory Default Settings
General
Start Page
Search Page
Cache Size
Connection
Use LAN
Autodial Name
Proxy Server
Security
Allow cookies
Allow TLS 1.0 security
Allow SSL 2.0 security
Allow SSL 3.0 security
Warn when switching
Advanced
Display web images
Play web sounds
Enable web scripting
Display script error note
Underline links
http://www.lxe.com/
http://www.google.com
512 Kb
Disabled
Blank
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Never
Select a tab. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Keyboard
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon
Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate.
Factory Default Settings
Repeat
Enable
Delay
Short
Rate
Slow
Key Map
0409
There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on
the Keyboard Panel.
These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
318
Control Panel Options
Mixer
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mixer Icon
Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input.
Factory Default Settings
Master Volume 0dB
Record Gain
22.5dB
Sidetone
12.0dB
Input
None
Input Boost
Disabled
Figure C-12 Mixer
Select the Input for the mixer. Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level. Tap OK to save the
settings.
The following options are available for Input
•
None – No microphone. Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the
device.
•
Mic1 – Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the
device.
•
Bluetooth – Reserved for future use.
When checked, (enabled) Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20
dB. Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
319
Mouse
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen.
Network and Dialup Connections
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections
Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection on the VX6.
To configure the VX6 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address, select the desired connection. The
default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP.
A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP address radio button and entering
the desired IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
Figure C-13 Network Connection Properties
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
320
Control Panel Options
Owner
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon
Set VX6 owner details.
Factory Default Settings
Identification
Blank
Notes
Blank
There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information and
click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Figure C-14 Owner Properties
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
321
Password
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon
Set VX6 access/power up password properties.
Factory Default Settings
Password
Blank
At Power On
Disabled
Note:
Once a password is assigned, the Owner and Password Control Panel options require
the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you
forget the password, it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit
(which erases all memory).
Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes. The
password is immediately in effect.
Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On.
Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver.
If there is no screensaver chosen, this checkbox is ignored.
Note:
Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers.
Figure C-15 Password Properties
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
322
Control Panel Options
PC Connection
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection
Control the connection between the VX6 and a nearby desktop/laptop computer.
Factory Default Settings
Allow Connection
Enabled
Connect Using
‘USB Client’
Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
Unchecking the “Allow connection with …..” disables ActiveSync.
Change ….
Clicking Change lists configured ActiveSync connections. In addition, there is a checkbox for
Automatic Connect. This option applies to USB connection only. If this checkbox is checked,
when the USB cable is connected, the VX6 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the
USB port. Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time.
Figure C-16 Communication / PC Connection Tab
Please refer to the “Backup VX6 Files” section later in this chapter for parameter setting
recommendations.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
323
PCMCIA
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA
Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots. Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and
the Compact Flash slot is provided.
Factory Default Settings
Disable slot now
Unchecked
The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters. If a card is present in the slot, a
description of the card is displayed. To disable a slot, check the Disable slot now checkbox and
tap OK. The change takes effect immediately. Slot 0 is the lower slot, labeled “PCMCIA B”. Slot
1 is the upper slot, labeled “PCMCIA A”.
Figure C-17 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1
The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive. There are no user
configurable options.
Figure C-18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
324
Control Panel Options
Power
Depending on the Software Revision, some devices may have a Schemes tab.
Factory Default Settings
Switch state to User Idle
Switch state to System Idle
Switch state to Suspen
Never
Never
Never
The Schemes tab can be used to control the display backlight and shut the VX6 Off. The mode
timers are cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has
expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. For
example, if the User Idle timer is set to Never, the power scheme timers never place the device in
User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes.
For a VX6, the User Idle state turns off the display, display backlight and keyboard backlight.
There is no System Idle mode so the VX6 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer
expires or a primary even occurs.
Please see “Power Modes” in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”.
IMPORTANT: There is no Suspend mode on the VX6. If the Suspend timer is enabled, the
VX6 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires.
Figure C-19 Power Properties
The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices. Note that since the VX6
does not support power management, all devices show the “high” power level. There are no user
options on this screen.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
325
Regional Settings
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings
Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings.
Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Options (and defaults) for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image.
Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details.
Factory Default Settings
Regional Setting
English (United States)
Number
123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg
Currency
$123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg
Time
h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM)
Date
M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long
Tap the Customize button to set Number, Currency, Time and Date format for the selected
Locale.
Remove Programs
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs
No change from general desktop Remove Programs options. Select a program and click Remove.
Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed only programs. The change takes
effect immediately.
Scanner
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner
Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings.
Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports.
To set the Scanner parameters, please see Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details.
Storage Manager
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Storage Manager
Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box. To view information
about the disk or perform store operations, select a device from the list.
On-line help is available for this option.
Topics available are:
•
Manage storage devices
•
Manage disk partitions
•
Creating a new partition
•
Advanced partition features
LXE recommends caution when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating
new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device.
The internal ATA (System) card does not appear in the Storage Manager menu.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
326
Control Panel Options
Stylus
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus
Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel.
Double Tap
Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Calibration
Figure C-20 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start
Figure C-21 Stylus Properties / Recalibration
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
327
System
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon
Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory
settings.
Factory Default Settings
General
N/A
Memory
1/3 storage, 2/3 program memory
Device Name
VXC0001
Device
LXE_VXC
Description
Copyrights
N/A
General
Figure C-22 System / General tab
System:
This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be
changed by the user.
Computer:
The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of
the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and
the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user.
Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system
with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE
operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the
internal ATA card used for storage.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
328
Control Panel Options
Memory
Figure C-23 System / Memory
Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a
file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the VX6 is running slowly, try increasing the
amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The
changes take effect immediately.
Device Name
Figure C-24 System / Device Name
The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the
keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately.
Copyrights
This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by
the user.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Control Panel Options
329
Volume and Sounds
Access:
Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds Icon
Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events.
Factory Default Settings
Volume
Events
Enabled
Application
Enabled
Notifications
Enabled
Volume
Middle of Bar
Key click
Loud
Screen tap
Loud
Sounds
Scheme
LOUD!
Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take
effect immediately.
Figure C-25 Volume and Sounds
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
330
VX6 Reference Guide
Control Panel Options
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Appendix D Reference Material
Introduction
Contents of this Appendix include:
•
AppLock Error Messages and Registry Settings
•
Revision History
and the following charts:
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
•
Valid VK Codes for CE
•
ASCII Control Codes
•
Hat Encoding
•
Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart
VX6 Reference Guide
332
AppLock Error Messages
AppLock Error Messages
Any messages whose first word is an ‘ing’ word is output prior to the action described in the
message. For example, “Switching to admin-hotkey press” is logged after the administrator has
pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process.
For all operations that can result in an error, an Error level message is displayed when a failure
occurs. These messages contain the word “failure”. These messages have a partner Extended level
message that is logged which contains the word “OK” if the action completed successfully rather
than with an error.
For processing level messages, “Enter…” is logged at the beginning of the function specified in
the message and “Exit…” is logged at the end (just before the return) of the function specified in
the message.
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Error reading hotkey
The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock.
LOG_EX
Error reading hotkey; using default
A hotkey is required. If there is a failure reading the
hotkey, the internal factory default is used.
LOG_ERROR
App Command Line= <Command
line>
Command line of the application being locked
LOG_PROCESSING
App= <Application name>
Name of the application being locked
LOG_PROCESSING
dwProcessID= <#>
Device ID of the application being locked
LOG_EX
Encrypt exported key len <#>
Size of encrypt export key
LOG_EX
Encrypt password length= <#>
The length of the encrypted password.
LOG_EX
Encrypted data len <#>
Length of the encrypted password
LOG_EX
hProcess= <#>
Handle of the application being locked
LOG_EX
Key pressed = <#>
A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey
processing.
LOG_EX
*****************
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file has been opened successfully.
LOG_EX
Address of keyboard hook
procedure failure
AppLock found the kbdhook.dll, but was unable to get
the address of the initialization procedure. For some
reason the dll is corrupted. Look in the \Windows
directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also
delete AppLock.exe from the \Windows directory and
reboot the unit. Deleting AppLock.exe triggers the
AppLock system to reload.
LOG_ERROR
Address of keyboard hook
procedure OK
AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the
keyboard filter initialization procedure.
LOG_EX
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
333
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Alt pressed
The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
LOG_EX
Alt
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
LOG_EX
Application handle search failure
The application being locked did not complete
initialization.
LOG_ERROR
Application handle search OK
The application initialized itself successfully
LOG_ERROR
Application load failure
The application could not be launched by AppLock; the
application could not be found or is corrupted.
LOG_ERROR
Backdoor message received
The backdoor keys have been pressed. The backdoor
hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a
user back into their system without editing the registry
or reloading the device.
LOG_PROCESSING
Cannot find kbdhook.dll
The load of the keyboard filter failed. This occurs when
the dll is missing or is corrupted. Look in the \Windows
directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also
delete AppLock.exe from the \Windows directory and
reboot the unit. Deleting AppLock.exe triggers the
AppLock system to reload.
LOG_ERROR
Converted Pwd
Converted password from wide to mbs.
LOG_EX
Could not create event
EVT_HOTKEYCHG
The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator
Control panel. The event could not be created.
LOG_ERROR
Could not hook keyboard
If the keyboard cannot be controlled, AppLock cannot
process the hotkey. This failure prevents a mode switch
into user mode.
LOG_ERROR
Could not start thread HotKeyMon
The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes.
The watch process could not be initiated.
LOG_ERROR
Ctrl after L or X
Processing the backdoor entry.
LOG_EX
Ctrl pressed
The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
LOG_EX
Ctrl
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry.
LOG_EX
Decrypt acquire context failure
Unable to decrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Decrypt acquired context OK
Decryption process ok.
LOG_EX
Decrypt create hash failure
Unable to decrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Decrypt created hash OK
Decryption process ok.
LOG_EX
Decrypt failure
Unable to decrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
334
AppLock Error Messages
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Decrypt import key failure
Unable to decrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Decrypt imported key OK
Decryption process ok.
LOG_EX
Encrypt acquire context failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt acquire encrypt context
failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt acquired encrypt context
OK
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Encrypt create hash failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt create key failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt created encrypt hash OK
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Encrypt export key failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt export key length failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt exported key OK
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Encrypt failure
The password encryption failed.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt gen key failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt generate key failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt get user key failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt get user key ok
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Encrypt hash data failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt hash data from pwd OK
Encrypt password process successful.
LOG_EX
Encrypt length failure
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypt out of memory for key
Unable to encrypt password.
LOG_ERROR
Encrypted data OK
The password has been successfully encrypted.
LOG_EX
Enter AppLockEnumWindows
In order for AppLock to control the application being
locked so it can prevent the application from exiting,
AppLock launches the application and has to wait until
it has created and initialized its main window. This
message is logged when the function that waits for the
application initialization is entered.
LOG_EX
Enter DecryptPwd
Entering the password decryption process.
LOG_PROCESSING
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
335
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Enter EncryptPwd
Entering the password encryption processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter FullScreenMode
Entering the function that switches the screen mode. In
full screen mode, the taskbar is hidden and disabled.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter GetAppInfo
Processing is at the beginning of the function that
retrieves the application information from the registry.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter password dialog
Entering the password dialog processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter password timeout
Entering the password timeout processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter restart app timer
Some application shut down before AppLock can stop
it. In these cases, AppLock gets notification of the exit.
When the notification is received, AppLock starts a
timer to restart the application. This message logs that
the timer has expired and the processing is at the
beginning of the timer function.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter TaskbarScreenMode
Entering the function that switches the screen to non-full
screen mode and enable the taskbar.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter ToAdmin
Entering the function that handles a mode switch into
admin mode.
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter ToUser
Entering the function that handles the mode switch to
user mode
LOG_PROCESSING
Enter verify password
Entering the password verification processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit AppLockEnumWindowsFound
There are two exit paths from the enumeration function.
This message denotes the enumeration function found
the application.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit AppLockEnumWindows-Not
found
There are two exit paths from the enumeration function.
This message denotes the enumeration function did not
find the application.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit DecryptPwd
Exiting password decryption processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit EncryptPwd
Exiting password encryption processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit FullScreenMode
Exiting the function that switches the screen to full
screen.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit GetAppInfo
Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the
application information from the registry.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit password dialog
Exiting password prompt processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit password dialog-cancel
Exiting password prompt w/cancel.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit password dialog-OK
Exiting password prompt successfully.
LOG_PROCESSING
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
336
AppLock Error Messages
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Exit password timeout
Exiting password timeout processing.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit restart app timer
Processing is at the end of the timer function
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit TaskbarScreenMode
Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back
to normal operation for the administrator.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit ToAdmin
Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into
admin mode.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit ToUser
Exiting the user mode switch function.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit ToUser-Registry read failure
The AppName value does not exist in the registry so
user mode cannot be entered.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit verify password-no pwd set
Exiting password verification.
LOG_PROCESSING
Exit verify password-response from
dialog
Exiting password verification.
LOG_PROCESSING
Found taskbar
The handle to the taskbar has been found so that
AppLock can disable it in user mode.
LOG_PROCESSING
Getting address of keyboard hook
init procedure
AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook.
LOG_PROCESSING
Getting configuration from registry
The AppLock configuration is being read from the
registry. This occurs at initialization and also at entry
into user mode. The registry must be re-read at entry
into user mode in case the administration changed the
settings of the application being controlled.
LOG_PROCESSING
Getting encrypt pwd length
The length of the encrypted password is being
calculated.
LOG_EX
Hook wndproc failure
AppLock is unable to lock the application. This could
happen if the application being locked encountered an
error after performing its initialization and shut itself
down prior to being locked by AppLock.
LOG_ERROR
Hook wndproc of open app failure
The application is open, but AppLock cannot lock it.
LOG_ERROR
Hot key event creation failure
The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey
notification.
LOG_ERROR
Hot key pressed
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
LOG_EX
Hot key pressed
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
LOG_EX
Hot key set event failure
When the administrator changes the hotkey
configuration the hotkey controller must be notified.
This notification failed.
LOG_ERROR
Hotkey press message received
The user just pressed the configured hotkey.
LOG_PROCESSING
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
337
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
In app hook:WM_SIZE
In addition to preventing the locked application from
exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from
enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s
window. This message traps a change in the window
size and corrects it.
LOG_EX
In app
hook:WM_WINDOWPOSCHANG
ED
In addition to preventing the locked application from
exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from
enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s
window. This message traps a change in the window
position and corrects it.
LOG_EX
Initializing keyboard hook
procedure
AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization.
LOG_PROCESSING
Keyboard hook initialization failure
The keyboard filter initialization failed.
LOG_ERROR
Keyboard hook loaded OK
The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully.
LOG_EX
L after Ctrl
Processing the backdoor entry.
LOG_EX
Loading keyboard hook
When AppLock first loads, it loads a dll that contains
the keyboard hook processing. This message is logged
prior to the load attempt.
LOG_PROCESSING
Open failure
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file open has failed. This could occur if the file is write
protected. If the file does not exist, it is created.
LOG_ERROR
Open registry failure
If the Administration registry key does not exist, the
switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in
the Administration key is not available.
LOG_ERROR
Opened status file
The status information is being saved to a file and the
file has been opened successfully.
LOG_EX
Out of memory for encrypted pwd
Not enough memory to encrypt the password.
LOG_ERROR
pRealTaskbarWndProc already set
The taskbar control has already been installed.
LOG_EX
Pwd cancelled or invalid-remain in
user mode
The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the
maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password
was exceeded.
LOG_EX
Read registry error-hot key
The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty. This is
not considered an error. The keyboard hook uses an
embedded default if the value is not set in the registry.
LOG_ERROR
Read registry failure-app name
AppName registry value does not exist or is empty. This
constitutes a failure for switching into user mode.
LOG_ERROR
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
338
AppLock Error Messages
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Read registry failure-Cmd Line
AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty.
This is not considered an error since command line
information is not necessary to launch and lock the
application.
LOG_ERROR
Read registry failure-Internet
The Internet registry entry is missing or empty. This is
not considered an error since the Internet value is not
necessary to launch and lock the application.
LOG_ERROR
Registering Backdoor MSG
The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard
hook via a user defined message. Both AppLock.exe
and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization.
LOG_PROCESSING
Registering Hotkey MSG
The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard
hook via a user defined message. Both Applock.exe and
Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization.
LOG_PROCESSING
Registry read failure at reenter user
mode
The registry has to be read when entering user mode is
the AppName is missing. This user mode entry is
attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the
administrator has closed the application being locked or
has changed the application name or command line.
LOG_ERROR
Registry read failure at reenter user
mode
The registry has to be read when switching into user
mode. This is because the administrator can change the
settings during administration mode. The read of the
registry failed which means the Administration key was
not found or the AppName value was missing or empty.
LOG_ERROR
Registry read failure
The registry read failed. The registry information read
when this message is logged is the application
information. It the Administration key cannot be opened
or if the AppName value is missing or empty, this error
is logged. The other application information is not
required. If the AppName value is not available,
AppLock cannot switch into user mode.
LOG_ERROR
Reset system work area failure
The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to
cover the taskbar area. The system work area has to be
adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration
mode. AppLock was unable to adjust this area.
LOG_ERROR
Shift pressed
The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the
HotKey processing.
LOG_EX
Shift
Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry
LOG_EX
Show taskbar
The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to admin-backdoor
The system is currently in user mode and is now
switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because
of the backdoor key presses were entered by the
administrator.
LOG_PROCESSING
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
AppLock Error Messages
339
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Switching to admin-hotkey press
The system is currently in user mode and is now
switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because
of a hotkey press by the administrator.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to admin-kbdhook.dll not
found
The keyboard hook load failed, so AppLock switches to
admin mode. If a password is specified, the password
prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password
is entered.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to admin-keyboard hook
initialization failure
If the keyboard hook initialization fails, AppLock
switches to admin mode. If a password is specified, the
password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid
password is entered.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to admin-registry read
failure
See the explanation of the “Registry read failure” above.
AppLock is switching into Admin mode. If a password
has been configured, the prompt will be displayed and
will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to TaskbarScreenMode
In administration mode, the taskbar is visible and
enabled.
LOG_EX
Switching to user mode
The registry was successfully read and AppLock is
starting the process to switch to user mode.
LOG_PROCESSING
Switching to user-hotkey press
The system is currently in admin mode and is now
switching to user mode. The switch occurred because of
a hotkey press by the administrator.
LOG_PROCESSING
Taskbar hook failure
AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the
locked application from re-enabling it.
LOG_ERROR
Taskbar hook OK
AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar.
LOG_EX
Timeout looking for app window
After the application is launched, AppLock must wait
until the application has initialized itself before
proceeding. The application did not start successfully
and AppLock has timed out.
LOG_ERROR
ToUser after admin, not at boot
The user mode switch is attempted when the device
boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey. The
mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press.
LOG_EX
ToUser after admin-app still open
The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey
press and the administrator has left the application open
and has not made any changes in the configuration.
LOG_EX
ToUser after admin-no app or cmd
line change
If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press, the
administrator may have left the configured application
open. If so, AppLock does not launch the application
again unless a new application or command line has
been specified; otherwise, it just locks it.
LOG_EX
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
340
AppLock Error Messages
Message
Explanation and/or corrective action
Level
Unable to move desktop
The desktop is moved when switching into user mode.
This prevents them from being visible if the application
is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not
affect the screen mode switch; processing continues.
LOG_ERROR
Unable to move taskbar
The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode.
This prevents them from being visible if the application
is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not
affect the screen mode switch; processing continues.
LOG_ERROR
Unhook taskbar wndproc failure
AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar.
This error does not affect AppLock processing
LOG_ERROR
Unhook wndproc failure
AppLock could not remove the hook that allows
monitoring of the application.
LOG_ERROR
Unhooking taskbar
In administration mode, the taskbar should return to
normal operation, so AppLock’s control of the taskbar
should be removed.
LOG_EX
Unhooking wndproc
When the administrator leaves user mode, the device is
fully operational; therefore, AppLock must stop
monitoring the locked application.
LOG_EX
WM_SIZE adjusted
This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the
window size.
LOG_EX
X after Ctrl+L
Processing the backdoor entry.
LOG_EX
Ret from password <#>
Return value from password dialog.
LOG_EX
Decrypt data len <#>
Length of decrypted password.
LOG_EX
Window handle to
enumwindows=%x
The window handle that is passed to the enumeration
function. This message can be used by engineering with
other development tools to trouble shoot application
lock failures.
LOG_EX
WM_WINDOWPOSCHG
adjusted=%x
Output the window size after it has been adjusted by
AppLock
LOG_EX
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
AppLock Registry Settings
341
AppLock Registry Settings
This system application runs at startup via the “launch” feature of LXE Windows CE devices.
When the launch feature is installed on the device, the following registry settings are created. The
launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Filename=AppLock.exe
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Installed=
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\FileCheck=
AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters
that are needed by the application. These registry settings are as follows:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Administration\\AppName
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppCommandLine=
In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application, additional registry settings are
needed to store the configuration options for AppLock. These options include, among others, the
administrator’s password and hotkey.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\HotKey=
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\EP=
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
342
Valid VK Codes for CE
Valid VK Codes for CE
This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler. Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further
clarification of the meaning of these key codes. Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under
Windows CE .
VK_ADD
VK_APOSTROPHE
VK_APPS
VK_ATTN
VK_BACK
VK_BACKQUOTE
VK_BACKSLASH
VK_BROWSER_BACK
VK_BROWSER_FAVORITES
VK_BROWSER_FORWARD
VK_BROWSER_HOME
VK_BROWSER_REFRESH
VK_BROWSER_SEARCH
VK_BROWSER_STOP
VK_CANCEL
VK_CAPITAL
VK_CLEAR
VK_COMMA
VK_CONTROL
VK_CONVERT
VK_CRSEL
VK_DECIMAL
VK_DELETE
VK_DIVIDE
VK_DOWN
VK_END
VK_EQUAL
VK_EREOF
VK_ESCAPE
VK_EXECUTE
VK_EXSEL
VK_F1
VK_F10
VK_F11
VK_F12
VK_F13
VK_F14
VK_F15
VK_F16
VK_F17
VK_F18
VK_F19
VK_F2
VK_F20
VK_F21
VK_F22
VK_F23
VK_F24
VX6 Reference Guide
VK_F3
VK_F4
VK_F5
VK_F6
VK_F7
VK_F8
VK_F9
VK_FINAL
VK_HANGUL
VK_HANJA
VK_HELP
VK_HOME
VK_HYPHEN
VK_INSERT
VK_JUNJA
VK_KANA
VK_KANJI
VK_LAUNCH_APP1
VK_LAUNCH_APP2
VK_LAUNCH_MAIL
VK_LAUNCH_MEDIA_SELECT
VK_LBRACKET
VK_LBUTTON
VK_LCONTROL
VK_LEFT
VK_LMENU
VK_LSHIFT
VK_LWIN
VK_MBUTTON
VK_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK
VK_MEDIA_PLAY_PAUSE
VK_MEDIA_PREV_TRACK
VK_MEDIA_STOP
VK_MENU
VK_MULTIPLY
VK_NEXT
VK_NOCONVERT
VK_NONAME
VK_NUMLOCK
VK_NUMPAD0
VK_NUMPAD1
VK_NUMPAD2
VK_NUMPAD3
VK_NUMPAD4
VK_NUMPAD5
VK_NUMPAD6
VK_NUMPAD7
VK_NUMPAD8
VK_NUMPAD9
VK_OEM_CLEAR
VK_OFF
VK_PA1
VK_PAUSE
VK_PERIOD
VK_PLAY
VK_PRINT
VK_PRIOR
VK_RBRACKET
VK_RBUTTON
VK_RCONTROL
VK_RETURN
VK_RIGHT
VK_RMENU
VK_RSHIFT
VK_RWIN
VK_SCROLL
VK_SELECT
VK_SEMICOLON
VK_SEPARATOR
VK_SHIFT
VK_SLASH
VK_SLEEP
VK_SNAPSHOT
VK_SPACE
VK_SUBTRACT
VK_TAB
VK_UP
VK_VOLUME_DOWN
VK_VOLUME_MUTE
VK_VOLUME_UP
VK_ZOOM
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
ASCII Control Codes
343
ASCII Control Codes
The following table lists ASCII Control codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control-key combinations.
Char
Hex
ControlKey
Control Action
NUL
0
^@
NULL character
Ctrl-Shift-`
SOH
1
^A
Start Of Heading
VK_CONTROL (0x11) down
VK_A (0x41) down
WM_CHAR (0x1)
VK_A (0x41) up
VK_CONTROL (0x11) up
STX
2
^B
Start of TeXt
Ctrl-b
ETX
3
^C
End of TeXt
Ctrl-c
EOT
4
^D
End Of Transmission
Ctrl-d
ENQ
5
^E
ENQuiry
Ctrl-e
ACK
6
^F
ACKnowledge
Ctrl-f
BEL
7
^G
BELl, rings terminal bell
Ctrl-g
BS
8
^H
BackSpace (non-destructive)
Ctrl-h
HT
9
^I
Horizontal Tab (move to next tab position)
Ctrl-i
LF
a
^J
Line Feed
Ctrl-j
VT
b
^K
Vertical Tab
Ctrl-k
FF
c
^L
Form Feed
Ctrl-l
CR
d
^M
Carriage Return
Ctrl-m
SO
e
^N
Shift Out
Ctrl-n
SI
f
^O
Shift In
Ctrl-o
DLE
10
^P
Data Link Escape
Ctrl-p
DC1
11
^Q
Device Control 1, normally XON
Ctrl-q
DC2
12
^R
Device Control 2
Ctrl-r
DC3
13
^S
Device Control 3, normally XOFF
Ctrl-s
DC4
14
^T
Device Control 4
Ctrl-t
NAK
15
^U
Negative AcKnowledge
Ctrl-u
SYN
16
^V
SYNchronous idle
Ctrl-v
ETB
17
^W
End Transmission Block
Ctrl-w
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
344
ASCII Control Codes
Char
Hex
ControlKey
CAN
17
^X
CANcel line
Ctrl-x
EM
19
^Y
End of Medium
Ctrl-y
SUB
1a
^Z
SUBstitute
Ctrl-z
ESCape
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1b
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
File Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1c
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
Group Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1d down
WM_CHAR (0x1d) up
VK_PACKET up
VK_CONTROL up
Record Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11)down
VK_SHIFT (0x10) down
WM_CHAR 0x36 down
WM_CHAR 0x36 up
VK_SHIFT up
VK_CONTROL up
Unit Separator
VK_CONTROL (0x11) down
VK_SHIFT (0x10) down
VK_PACKET (0xe7) down
WM_CHAR 0x1f
VK_PACKET (0xe7) up
VK_SHIFT (0x10) up
VK_CONTROL (0x11) up
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
1b
1c
1d
1e
1f
VX6 Reference Guide
^[
^\
^]
^^
^_
Control Action
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Hat Encoding
345
Hat Encoding
The VX6 supports only 7-bit hat encoding which means only ^@ through ^_ (underscore) are supported.
Desired
ASCII
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1 (XON)
DC2
DC3 (XOFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
IND
NEL
SSA
®
¯
°
±
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Desired
ASCII
0X00
0X01
0X02
0X03
0X04
0X05
0X06
0X07
0X08
0X09
0X0A
0X0B
0X0C
0X0D
0X0E
0X0F
0X10
0X11
0X12
0X13
0X14
0X15
0X16
0X17
0X18
0X19
0X1A
0X1B
0X1C
0X1D
0X1E
0X1F
0X7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
AE
AF
B0
B1
^@
^A
^B
^C
^D
^E
^F
^G
^H
^I
^J
^K
^L
^M
^N
^O
^P
^Q
^R
^S
^T
^U
^V
^W
^X
^Y
^Z
^[
^\\
^]
^^
^_ (Underscore)
^?
~^@
~^A
~^B
~^C
~^D
~^E
~^F
~. (Period)
~/
~0 (Zero)
~1
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
(no-break space)
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
~^G
~^H
~^I
~^J
~^K
~^L
~^M
~^N
~^O
~^P
~^Q
~^R
~^S
~^T
~^U
~^V
~^W
~^X
~^Y
~^Z
~^[
~^\\
~^]
~^^
~^_ (Underscore)
~ (Tilde and Space)
~!
~”
~#
~$
~%
~&
§
¨
©
ª
«
¬
(soft hyphen)
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
D7
D8
D9
DA
~’
~(
~)
~*
~+
~,
~- (Dash)
~W
~X
~Y
~Z
VX6 Reference Guide
346
Hat Encoding
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
²
³
´
µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼
½
¾
¿
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
~7
~8
~9
~:
~;
~<
~=
~>
~?
[email protected]
~A
~B
~C
~D
~E
~F
~G
~H
~I
~J
~K
~L
~M
~N
~O
~P
~Q
~R
~S
~T
~U
~V
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
VX6 Reference Guide
Hat
Encoded
~[
~\\
~]
~\^
~_ (Underscore)
~`
~a
~b
~c
~d
~e
~f
~g
~h
~i
~j
~k
~l
~m
~n
~o
~p
~q
~r
~s
~t
~u
~v
~w
~x
~y
~z
~{
~|
~}
~~
~^?
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart
347
Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
0x2C
0x2D
0x2E
0x2F
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3A
0x3B
0x3C
0x3D
0x3E
0x3F
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x45
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B
0x4C
0x4D
0x4E
0x4F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
0x50
0x51
0x52
0x53
0x54
0x55
0x56
0x57
0x58
0x59
0x5A
0x5B
0x5C
0x5D
0x5E
0x5F
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x65
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B
0x6C
0x6D
0x6E
0x6F
0x70
0x71
0x72
0x73
0x74
0x75
0x76
0x77
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
0x78
0x79
0x7A
0x7B
0x7C
0x7D
0x7E
0x7F
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
0x87
0x88
0x89
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0x8E
0x8F
0x90
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9A
0x9B
0x9C
0x9D
0x9E
0x9F
Figure D-1 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal)
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
348
Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
0xA0
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xA5
0xA6
0xA7
0xA8
0xA9
0xAA
0xAB
0xAC
0xAD
0xAE
0xAF
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
0xC8
0xC9
0xCA
0xCB
0xCC
0xCD
0xCE
0xCF
0xD0
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
0xD7
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
0xB0
0xB1
0xB2
0xB3
0xB4
0xB5
0xB6
0xB7
0xB8
0xB9
0xBA
0xBB
0xBC
0xBD
0xBE
0xBF
0xC0
0xC1
0xC2
0xC3
0xC4
0xC5
0xC6
0xC7
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
0xD8
0xD9
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDE
0xDF
0xE0
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
0xEA
0xEB
0xEC
0xED
0xEE
0xEF
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
0xF0
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF6
0xF7
0xF8
0xF9
0xFA
0xFB
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
Figure D-2 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal)
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Revision History
349
Revision History
Revision A, Initial Release: November 2004
Revision B: August 2005
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Revised “Document Conventions”, “When To Use This Guide”,
“Touchscreen and Mouse” and “Accessories” sections.
Specified the proper USB adapter cable to use in “Connect” section.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Added “Identifying Your VX6”, “USB Keyboard/Mouse” and
“Touchscreen Heater” sections.
Updated “The Keyboards”, “CAPS LED”, “On/Off Switch”, “General
Windows CE .NET Keyboard Shortcuts” and “Ethernet/USB Dongle
Cable” sections.
Replaced “CapsLock, Scroll Lock and the VX6” section with “CapsLock
and the VX6” and “Scroll Lock and the VX6” sections.
Replaced “Antenna Connector” section with “Antenna Connections”
section.
Chapter 4 – System
Configuration
Revised “About”, “administrator Control”, “LAUNCH.EXE”, “Reflash the
VX6”, “Cisco Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)”, “Symbol”,
“Accessibility” and “Date/Time” sections.
Added “2.4GHz Radio Configuration”, “Disabling the Touchscreen
Heater”, “Configuring CapsLock Behavior” and “Configuring IPv6
Broadcast Messages” sections.
Removed “Cisco – Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)” and “Symbol”
sections. This information is now included in Chapter 5.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Added new chapter containing sections removed from Chapter 4.
Appendix A – Key Maps
Revised “Keymap Source Format” and “COLxROWx Format” sections.
Revision C: October 2005
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Updated “When To Use This Guide”.
Updated “Accessories” list.
Chapter 4 – System
Configuration
Renamed “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages” section to “Configuring
IPv6” and revised section.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised “Introduction” and “Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU)” section.
Renamed “Configuring VX6 Radio” to “Configuring VX6 Radio Without
WPA”.
Added “WPA for the VX6” section.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
350
Revision History
Revision D: 2006
Section
Explanation
Entire Manual
Updated all images with the new LXE logo.
Notices
Updated copyrights and trademarks.
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Revised “Accessories” listing.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Revised “On/Off Switch”, “Scanner Serial Connector (COM1)”,
“Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3)”, “Install the 2.4GHz Type II
PCMCIA Radio”, “Custom Key Maps”, “Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)”,
“Video Subsystem” and “The Display” .
Added new section: “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable”.
Chapter 3 – Power Supply
Revised “VX6 Input Power Specifications”.
Chapter 4 – System
Configuration
Revised “Installed Software”, “Start Menu Program Options”, “Network
and Dialup Connections”, “Control Panel Options”, “About”, “Date/Time”,
“Keyboard”, “Password”, “Regional Settings”, “Remote Desktop
Connection”, “Scanner”, “Storage Manager”, “LAUNCH.EXE” and
“Reflash the VX6” sections.
Added new sections: “Folders Copies at Startup” and “Enabling
GrabTime”.
Removed section: “Bluetooth Manager”.
Renamed “VX6 Command Line Utility” to “VX6 Command Line Utilities”
and updated section.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised “Profiles Tab” section.
Split radio configuration section into two sections “Cisco Radio” and
“Symbol radio”. Added a new section, “Summit Radio”. Each section
contains the manufacturer specific configuration information.
Moved all certificate generating and installation instructions to a new
“Certificates” section.
Chapter 6 – AppLock
New chapter. Information previously included in Appendix B is now
referred to as “Single Application”.
Added Multi Application AppLock to chapter.
Appendix A – Key Maps
Revised section “Creating Custom Keymaps for the VX6”.
Appendix B – Technical
Specifications
Added “Revision History” to appendix.
Added Summit Radio Technical Specifications.
Appendix C – AppLock
Deleted appendix. Information is now included in Chapter 6, AppLock.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Revision History
351
Revision E: November 2006
Section
Explanation
Notices
Added Wavelink trademark information.
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Revised “When to Use this Guide”.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Added information that was previously included in Chapter 3, “Power
Supply”.
Chapter 3 – Power Supply
Deleted chapter. This information is now included in Chapter 2, “Physical
Description and Layout”.
Chapter 4 – System
Configuration
Renamed to Chapter 3, “System Configuration”.
Revised “Software Load”, “LAUNCH.EXE”, Control Panel Options” and
“Scanner” section. Scanner information is now included in Chapter 6,
“Scanner”.
Added new section “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration”.
Chapter 4 – Scanner
Created new chapter with scanner information removed from Chapter 4,
“System Configuration” and updated as necessary.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised “Summit Radio” section to include new Sign-On screen and
support for PEAP-GTC.
Chapter 6 – AppLock
Revised “Setup A New Device”.
Revision F: November 2007
Section
Explanation
Entire Manual
Added CE 5.0 information and instruction where applicable.
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Added Bluetooth information.
Revised “Accessories” listing.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Added Bluetooth information.
Revised “Vehicle 12-80VDC Power Connection” with updated graphic.
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Added Bluetooth information.
Revised “Mixer” and “Step 3: Check Barcode Length” sections.
Revised “Enabling GrabTime”.
Revised “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration” for Avalanche
Mobility Center.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Updated chapter for EAP-FAST support, tray icon, help feature, etc.
included in latest version of SCU.
Revised section: “Admin login”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
352
Revision History
Revision G: May 2008
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Revised “Accessories” listing.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Revised “Install the 2.4GHz Type II PCMCIA Radio” and “NumLock and
the VX6”.
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Revised “Control Panel Options”, “Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection”
and “Enabler Configuration”.
Added “Wi-Fi” and “eXpress Scan” sections.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised the following sections: “Introduction”, “Summit Radio”, “Summit
Client Utility”, “Main Tab”.
Revised Profile Tab parameters: “Radio Mode” and “TxPower”.
Revised Global Tab parameters: “TX Diversity”, “Rx Diversity”.
Added Global Tab parameter: “DFS Channels”.
Appendix A – Key maps
Revised NumLock information.
Appendix B – Technical
Specifications
Revised “Network Device Specifications”.
Revision H: September 2008
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Added section “Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect”.
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Revised section “Custom Key Maps”.
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Removed sections “Storage Manager”, “Disabling the Touchscreen”,
“Disabling the Touchscreen Heater”, “Configuring CapsLock Behavior”,
“Configuring IPv6” and “Enabling GrabTime”.
Revised sections “Control Panel Options”and “LAUNCH.EXE”.
Added section “KeyPad”, “MX3-VXC Options”.
Chapter 4 – Scanner
Revised chapter.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised section “Summit Radio”.
Chapter 6 – AppLock
Added sections “Match” and “Options Tab”.
Revised section “Launch Button”.
Appendix A – Key Maps
Removed section “Creating Custom Keymaps”. Keymapping is now in the
KeyPad section of Chapter 3.
Revised section: “Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies”.
VX6 Reference Guide
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Revision History
353
Revision J: September 2008
Section
Explanation
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Added sections: “Auto Profile” and “Auth Server”
Revised sections: “Main Tab”, “Radio Mode” and “Hide Password”.
Revision K: January 2009
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Added new section “Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off”.
Revised section “Bluetooth”
Chapter 2 – Physical
Description and Layout
Revised section “Power Modes”
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Added new section “Status Popup”.
Chapter 5 – Wireless Network
Configuration
Revised sections: “Parameters” (both for Profile and Global) and “Sign-On
vs. Stored Credentials”.
Appendix C – VX6 CE .NET
4.2
Revised section “Power”.
Revised sections “Pairing and Auto-Reconnect”., “Power”
Revision L: April 2009
Section
Explanation
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Revised sections “Prompt if devices request to pair” and “Accessories”.
Chapter 3 – System
Configuration
Revised section “Options” (for Bluetooth Settings panel).
Chapter 6 - AppLock
Revised sections “End-User Switching Technique” and “Manual (Launch)”.
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
354
VX6 Reference Guide
Revision History
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Index
A
About
software, hardware, version, network IP ....88, 308
AC Adapter, Specifications ...................................289
AC to DC Power Supply .........................................69
Accessibility settings .......................................91, 311
Activation Key
AppLock ...............................................................5
ActiveSync
Cables..................................................................16
Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection......128
Configure ............................................................16
Connect .......................................................16, 127
Create Comm Option ........................................130
Explore..............................................................127
Help.............................................................82, 302
IR port transmission....................................82, 302
Options..............................................................126
Prerequisites......................................................126
Setup Wizard.....................................................126
Troubleshooting ................................................129
Use this cable ..............................................39, 131
Version 3.7..................................................82, 302
ActiveSync version 3.8............................................13
Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 Power Supply ..................72
Add prefix and suffix control ................................170
Admin Hotkey
AppLock ...........................................................269
Allow Close ...........................................................276
Allow Connection..........................................117, 322
Antenna
Connector, Location..........................................6, 8
Diversity
Receive........................................................198
Transmit ......................................................197
External...............................................................50
Internal ................................................................51
API calls ................................................................135
Appearance
Scheme......................................................102, 315
Application Panel ..................................................272
AppLock
End-user mode ..................................................269
EUIE .................................................................277
Hotkey for Administrator..................................269
Passwords..........................................................270
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Setup .................................................................265
AppLock Registry settings ....................................341
ASCII Control Codes in hex..................................343
At Power On..................................................116, 321
Audio
Connector............................................................46
Auto hide .........................................................86, 306
Auto-reconnect, Bluetooth ......................................99
B
Background and Window colors ...................102, 315
Backlight timers.............................................102, 315
Barcode
Data Entry .............................................................9
Enable or Disable..............................................163
Symbology Settings ..........................................165
Barcode data
edit buttons........................................................168
Barcode manipulation............................................160
Barcode match list .................................................168
Barcode processing overview................................159
Barcode scanner data entry........................................9
Barcode Tab ..........................................................163
Battery
CMOS, Specifications.......................................289
Battery Auto Turn Off ...................................102, 315
Baud Rate ..............................................120, 159, 325
Beeper, Specifications ...........................................289
Bluetooth
barcode reader setup ...........................................21
devices ................................................................20
Initial Use............................................................17
LXEZ Pairing specification ................................33
Options................................................................18
Subsequent Use...................................................19
Bluetooth control panel ...........................................93
Bluetooth Properties panel ......................................96
Bluetooth Settings, Chart.........................................97
C
CAB Files on the Flash Card.................................125
Calibration .....................................................121, 326
CAPS LOCK Mode LED Indicator.........................54
Caps-Lock Mode .....................................................54
Central Processing Unit...........................................31
Certificates.....................................................100, 312
VX6 Reference Guide
356
Root CA ............................................................251
User...................................................................255
Character Recognition
Touchscreen ................................................85, 305
Cisco
PEAP Suplicant.................................................226
WPA Radio Driver............................................225
Cisco Client ...........................................................224
Cisco Radio
WEP ..................................................................223
Cleaning
Display ................................................................60
Clear Contents of Document Folder ................86, 306
Clear persistant memory ........................................138
CMOS Battery .........................................................32
CMOS NiCd Battery ...............................................73
Code ID transmission setting.................................164
Coldboot ..................................................................24
COLDBOOT.EXE.................................................134
Color
Cable Wiring.......................................................71
Color screen
Backlight...................................................102, 315
COM port
screen blanking .................................................178
COM port settings tab ...........................................162
COM Ports.............................................120, 159, 325
COM1/Scanner Connection, Location ......................7
COM3 Connector, Location ......................................7
Comm Ports
COM1 ...........................................................36, 37
COM3 ...........................................................36, 38
Command Prompt............................................84, 304
Component Locations............................................6, 8
Computer Friendly Name ........................................98
Configuration
AppLock ...........................................................272
Ethernet.............................................................138
Connect
ActiveSync..................................................83, 303
Connect Using ...............................................117, 322
Connector
Audio ..................................................................46
USB.....................................................................41
Connectors...............................................................36
Connectors, Specifications ....................................289
Contrast Up and Down
Not applicable .....................................................56
Control characters..................................................171
Control Keys, location.............................................56
Control Panel options ......................................87, 307
Controller (Video), Specifications.........................289
Copyrights .....................................................123, 328
CPU .....................................................................1, 31
Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection ...114, 319
VX6 Reference Guide
Index
Ctrl Char Mapping.........................................163, 171
Current Time .................................................100, 313
Custom ID
parameters .........................................................173
Custom identifiers .................................................172
Custom Identifiers .................................................163
D
Data Bits ................................................120, 159, 325
Data entry ..................................................................9
Daylight Savings ...........................................100, 313
DB9-DB9 Serial Cable
Tech Specifications.....................................39, 131
Decimal - Hexadecimal Equivalent
0 - 159 ...............................................................347
160 - 255 ...........................................................348
Defaults
Caps Lock ...........................................................54
Delay .............................................................105, 317
Desktop............................................................79, 299
Device Name and description........................123, 328
DHCP ............................................................114, 319
Dialup properties for dial up access ..............101, 314
Dimensions, Specifications ...................................289
Discover and Query.................................................94
Display.....................................................................31
Brightness Control Keys .....................................56
Cleaning ..............................................................60
Contrast Control Keys.........................................56
Features...............................................................60
Pixels...................................................................60
Specifications............................................289, 291
Diversity
Receive..............................................................198
Transmit ............................................................197
Document Conventions .............................................3
Dot Pitch, Specifications .......................................291
E
EAP-TLS
Cisco Radio.......................................................242
Enable Code ID .............................................164, 172
Enable Code ID drop-down box............................163
Enable internal scanner sound ...............................161
Enable or Disable specific symbology ..................163
End user switching
Touch ................................................................271
Enter Data..................................................................9
Environmental Specification .................................290
Error Messages
AppLock ...........................................................332
Ethernet
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Index
Configuration ....................................................138
EUIE......................................................................277
Examples
Barcode processing ...........................................175
Control Code replacement ................................174
raw scanner data and resulting data ..................175
Expand Control Panel......................................86, 306
External Auto Turn Off .................................102, 315
External Connectors ................................................36
Audio ..................................................................46
Power ..................................................................47
Serial .............................................................37, 38
USB.....................................................................41
External Connectors, Specifications......................289
F
Factory Default Settings
ATA Compact Flash Slot..........................118, 323
Cisco Client.......................................................222
Date/Time .................................................100, 313
Display ......................................................102, 315
Input Panel ................................................103, 316
Internet Options ........................................104, 317
Keyboard...................................................105, 317
Owner........................................................115, 320
Password ...................................................116, 321
PC Connection ..........................................117, 322
PCMCIA Slots ..........................................118, 323
Regional Settings ..............................................120
Scanner......................................................120, 325
System.......................................................122, 327
Volume Mixer...........................................110, 318
Factory Default, reset to ........................................138
Features .....................................................................1
Flash and Reflash ..........................................136, 137
Flash Memory............................................................1
FTP Server, start and stop ...............................83, 303
Fuse
Replacement........................................................73
G
General ..........................................................122, 327
Getting Started...........................................................4
H
Hardware
Configuration ......................................................30
Version................................................29, 182, 225
Hat Encoded Characters ........................................179
Hat Encoding and RFID ........................................345
Heater, Touchscreen ................................................60
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
357
Hexadecimal - Decimal Equivalent
0x00 to 0x9F .....................................................347
0xA0 to 0xFF ....................................................348
Hidden Keys ............................................................53
Host Connection prerequisites.................................12
Hotkey
AppLock ...........................................................278
How To
Initiate Page Up command..................................55
Install Radio Card ...............................................63
Keyboard data entry..............................................9
Toggle 2nd key on and off ..................................55
Toggle Caps-Lock on and off .............................55
Type <!> .............................................................55
HyperTerminal ......................................................129
I
Icons
Explorer, Internet ........................................79, 299
My Computer ..............................................79, 299
My Documents............................................79, 299
Recycle Bin.................................................79, 299
Idle Time .......................................................102, 315
Input Panel.....................................................103, 316
Install
Equipment Needed..............................................63
Fuse.....................................................................73
Type II 2.4GHz Radio Card....................63, 67, 68
Internet Explorer
AppLock ...........................................................277
Radio card and ISP required .......................84, 304
Internet Options .............................................104, 317
CE 5.0 ...............................................................104
IP Address
DHCP........................................................114, 319
Static .........................................................114, 319
K
Key Map ................................................................283
101-Key Chart...................................................283
Hidden Keys .......................................................53
IBM 3270 keyboard ..........................................288
IBM 5270 keyboard ..........................................288
Keyboard
0409 ..........................................................105, 317
Backlight.............................................................53
Connector, Location..............................................7
Control Keys .......................................................56
Data entry..............................................................9
Hidden Key Functions ........................................53
LED Indicators....................................................54
Onscreen only ...........................................103, 316
VX6 Reference Guide
358
Shortcuts .............................................................57
KEYCOMP compiler ............................................342
L
LAUNCH.EXE......................................................132
LEAP
Cisco Radio.......................................................223
Summit Radio ...................................................208
LED indicators.........................................................54
LEDs
2nd ......................................................................55
Caps-Lock, CAPS ...............................................54
Secondary Keys ..................................................55
List configured ActiveSync connections .......117, 322
Location
Antenna Connector .............................................36
COM1 and COM3...............................................36
Fuse.....................................................................36
Power DC Connector ..........................................36
Power Switch ......................................................36
Printer Port..........................................................36
RS232 ports.........................................................36
Scanner Port........................................................36
Serial Ports ..........................................................36
USB Connector ...................................................36
Logging
AppLock ...........................................................281
Loss of Host Re-connection ..................................128
M
MAC Address..................................................90, 310
Main...............................................................120, 325
Manuals ...................................................................25
Match list ...............................................................168
rules...................................................................169
Match List rules.....................................................169
Media Player....................................................84, 304
Memory ...................................................31, 122, 327
allocate for programs or storage................123, 328
installed .....................................................122, 327
Menu Options
Start.............................................................81, 301
Modes
AppLock ...........................................................269
Mouse, USB ............................................................11
Multi-Application AppLock ..................................266
My Computer
Folders ........................................................80, 300
O
On/Off
VX6 Reference Guide
Index
condition of CapsLock......................................283
Switch .........................................................35, 289
Operating Temperature, Specifications .................290
Optional Power Supply............................................69
Owner
Identification .............................................115, 320
Notes .........................................................115, 320
P
Parity .....................................................120, 159, 325
Password........................................................116, 321
AppLock ...........................................................270
AppLock Save As .............................................281
lost at cold boot.................................................134
PC Card Slots, Location ........................................6, 8
PC Cards
Plug and Play ......................................................32
PCMCIA Cards
Plug and Play ......................................................32
Types, Specifications ........................................289
PCMCIA Slots.........................................................61
Disable/Enable ..........................................118, 323
PEAP/GTC
Cisco Radio.......................................................234
Summit Radio ...........................................212, 218
PEAP/MSCHAP
Cisco Radio.......................................................231
Summit Radio ...................................................210
Pen Stylus ..........................................................10, 60
Permanent storage of drivers and utilities .............125
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver ......................................63
Physical Controls.....................................................35
Physical Specification............................................289
Pin 9
COM1 and Scanner.............................................37
Power ........................................................120, 325
Pin 9 Power ...........................................................159
Pinout
COM1 .................................................................37
COM3 .................................................................38
Power Cable
Adapting VX1/2/4 Power Supply .......................72
Power Connector .....................................................47
Location ................................................................7
Specification .....................................................289
Power Port 1 while asleep .....................................161
Power Status LED ...................................................35
Power Supply
CMOS Battery ....................................................32
CMOS NiCd Battery...........................................73
Specifications....................................................289
Power Switch...........................................................35
Location ................................................................7
Specifications....................................................289
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
Index
PREGEDIT.EXE ...................................................134
Pre-loaded Files .......................................76, 132, 296
Printer Serial Port ....................................................38
Processing order ....................................................165
Prompt
Command....................................................84, 304
Q
Quick Start Instructions.............................................4
R
Radio
MAC Address .............................................90, 310
Radio Specifications
2.4 GHz.....................................................292, 293
Rate................................................................105, 317
Recalibration..................................................121, 326
Reflash...........................................................136, 137
Regional Setting ....................................................120
Registry and save settings........................................24
Registry content
back up location ................................................125
Registry settings
AppLock ...........................................................341
REGLOAD.EXE ...................................................134
Remote desktop connection.............................85, 305
Remove user installed programs....................120, 325
Repeat............................................................105, 317
Replacement ..........................................................171
Resolution................................................................31
Resolution, Specifications .....................................291
Reverse Polarity.......................................................71
Revision History....................................................349
Revision Level
Hardware.............................................29, 182, 225
Software ..............................................................29
Root CA Certificates
Generating.........................................................251
Installing on VX6..............................................253
RS-232
Data Entry .............................................................9
Rules
match list...........................................................169
Match list ..........................................................169
S
Save settings ............................................................24
Scan Keys
Left and Right ...................................................159
Scanner
and Pin 9 on COM1 ............................................37
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
359
Data entry..............................................................9
Scanner Control Characters Tab............................171
Screen blanking .....................................................178
Cable ...................................................................40
SD Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs ............125
Secondary Mode LED Indicator..............................54
Security Options, Wirerless...................................181
Security Panel
AppLock ...........................................................278
Security Password
AppLock ...........................................................279
Send Key Messages and Wedge............................161
Serial Cable
for ActiveSync ............................................39, 131
Serial Connector ................................................37, 38
Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps .....111,
319
Setup
AppLock ...........................................................265
Show Clock .....................................................86, 306
Single Application AppLock .................................267
Slot 0 (Left) .............................................................61
Slot 1 (Right) ...........................................................61
Soft Keyboard................................................103, 316
Software and Files ...................................76, 132, 296
Software Load .................................................76, 296
Software Revision ...................................................29
Speaker Jack, Location..........................................6, 8
Speaker Volume Control Keys ................................56
Speaker/Beeper, Location......................................6, 8
Specifications
Audio Connector.................................................46
Display ..............................................................291
Environmental...................................................290
Input Power.........................................................72
Physical.............................................................289
Power Connector.................................................47
USB Connector ...................................................41
Start Menu .......................................................81, 301
Static IP Address ...........................................114, 319
Status LED Indicator ...............................................54
Status Panel
AppLock ...........................................................280
Status popup ..........................................................113
Stop Bits ................................................120, 159, 325
Storage Manager
devices ..............................................................325
Storage Temperature, Specifications .....................290
Stored certificates ..........................................100, 312
Strip Code ID.........................................................172
Strip leading and trailing .......................................167
Strip Leading and Trailing.....................................159
Stylus .................................................................10, 60
Data Entry ...........................................................10
properties ..................................................121, 326
VX6 Reference Guide
360
sensitivity ..................................................121, 326
Switch applications
Multi AppLock .....................................................5
Symbol ID
and EV-15 Imager.............................................164
Symbology setting parameters...............................166
Symbology Settings...............................................163
System
Hardware Configuration .....................................30
System Memory.......................................................31
System Requirements, WPA, Cisco ......................225
Index
V
Vehicle Chassis Ground ..........................................47
Vehicle Power ...................................................32, 69
Adapting VX1/2/4 Power Supply .......................72
Video Subsystem .....................................................31
View
Display ................................................................60
Viewing Area, Specifications ................................291
Virtual Keyboard ...........................................103, 316
VK_Code List........................................................342
T
W
Terminal Emulator List .............................................1
Terminal Emulator, connect ....................................12
Tile.................................................................102, 315
Time Zone .....................................................100, 313
Toggle 2nd key on and off ......................................55
Torque Wrench........................................................63
Touchscreen.......................................................10, 60
Data Entry ...........................................................10
Finger or Stylus...................................................10
Heater..................................................................60
Transcriber.......................................................85, 305
Translate All ..........................................................171
Translate control codes..........................................171
Troubleshooting
ActiveSync........................................................129
AppLock Password ...........................................270
Multi-Application AppLock .............................282
Type II 2.4GHz Radio Card ........................63, 67, 68
Warmboot................................................................24
WARMBOOT.EXE...............................................134
WAVPLAY.EXE ..................................................134
Wedge....................................................................161
Wedge, Barcode ....................................................159
WEP
Cisco Radio.......................................................223
Summit Radio ...................................................207
Symbol Radio....................................................249
When to use this guide ..............................................2
Windows
Network Configuration .....................................138
Windows CE on-line Help...............................79, 299
Windows Explorer...........................................85, 305
Windows version...........................................122, 327
Wire Color
Cable Wiring.......................................................71
WPA
Radio Driver, Cisco ..........................................225
Supported Authentications................................181
Cisco Radio .................................................225
Summit Radio..............................................182
System Requirements, Cisco.............................225
WPA/LEAP
Cisco Radio.......................................................239
Summit Radio ...........................................214, 216
WPA-PSK
Cisco Radio.......................................................246
Summit Radio ...................................................220
U
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ......................32
UPS..........................................................................32
Operating Temperature, Specifications.............291
Storage Temperature, Specifications ................291
USB
Connector............................................................41
USB Connector, Location .........................................7
USB Mouse .............................................................11
User Certificates
Generating.........................................................255
Installing on VX6..............................................260
User-specific application version information.88, 308
Utilities ..................................................................132
VX6 Reference Guide
Z
Zero Config Utility, Microsoft ..............................228
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
E-EQ-VX6RG-L-ARC
VX6 Reference Guide
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement